Nokia D211 User Manual
UserâÂÂs Guide Issue 1
2 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATIO N declare under our sole responsibility th at the produ ct DTE-1 is in conformity with the provision s of the f ollowing Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found fr om http://www.nokia.com/phones/declar ation_of_conformity/ Copyrig ht é Nokia Corporation 2002. All rights r e served. Reproduction, transfer, distributio n or storage of part or all of the contents in this docu ment in any form without the prior written permiss ion of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia and Nokia Connecting People a re registered trademarks of Noki a Corporation. Oth er product and compan y names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradena mes of their respec tive owners. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptograph ic or security protocol softwa re from RSA Security. Nokia operat es a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without pr ior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible f or any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequenti al or indirect da mages howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided "as is". Except as required by applicable law, no warrant ies of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. Nokia reserves t he right to revise thi s document or withdraw it at any time without prior n otice. The availabi lity of parti cular products may vary by region. Please che ck with the Nokia dealer nearest to you. Issue 1
For y our s afety 3 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. For your safet y R e a d t h e s e s i m p l e g u i d e l i n e s . B r e a k i n g t h e r u l e s m a y b e d a n g e r o u s o r i l l e g a l . Further detailed information is given in this manual. Do not switch the radio card on when wireless equipment use is prohibited or wh en it may cau se inte rfe re nce o r da nge r. Road safety comes first DonâÂÂt use the radio card while driv ing. Interference All radio car ds m ay get interf erence, which could affe ct performance. Switch off in hospitals Follow any regulations or rules. Swit ch the radio card off near medical equipm ent. Switch off in aircraft W i r e l e s s d e v i c e s c a n c a u s e i n t e r f e r e n c e i n a i r c r a f t . Switch off when refuelling DonâÂÂt use the radio card at a refuelling point. Do not u se near fuel or chemicals. Switch off near blasting DonâÂÂt use the radio card where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictio ns, and f ollow any regulations or rules. Use sensibly U s e o n l y i n t h e n o r m a l p o s i t i o n . D o n â t t o u c h t h e a n t e n n a u n n e c e s s a r i l y . Qualified service Only qualified personnel may repair radio card equipment. Accessories Use only approv ed acc essories. Do not co nnect incompatible products. Water-resistance Y o u r r a d i o c a r d i s n o t w a t e r - r e s i s t a n t . K e e p i t d r y . Back up copies Remember to make backup copies of all important data. Connecting to other devices W h e n c o n n e c t i n g t o a n y o t h e r d e v i c e , r e a d i t s u s e r ' s g u i d e f o r d e t a i l e d safety instruc tions. Do not connect incompatible pro ducts.
For y our s afety 4 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Network Services The radio card described in t his guide is approved for us e on the EGSM 900 and GSM 1800 net wo rks. D u a l b a n d i s a n e t w o r k d e p e n d a n t f e a t u r e . C h e c k w i t h y o u r l o c a l s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r if you can subscri be to a nd use t his feature. A number of feature s included in this guide are called Network Serv ices. These are special services that you arrange thr ough you r wireles s servic e provide r. Before y o u c a n t a k e a d v a n t a g e o f a n y o f t h e s e N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s , y o u m u s t s u b s c r i b e t o them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider. Note: Some GSM n etworks may not support all language-depe ndent characters and/or services.
Table of contents 5 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. T able of contents For your safety 3 Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Introduction 7 Data and fax communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 About data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 General P acket Radio Service (GPRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Installation 15 Installing the Nokia D2 1 1 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Uninstalling the Nokia D2 1 1 so ftware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Getting started 19 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Ending network connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Removing the radio card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Nokia D211 features 24 Manager and Monitor window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Profiles page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 To ols page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Administrator page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 WEP security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Nokia Short M essaging 46 Te xt messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Picture messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 Troubleshooting 53 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Table of contents 6 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Care and maintenance 56 Important safety information 57 Glossary 60 Index 63
Introd uction 7 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Introduction The Nokia D211 is a multimo de r adio card that combines General P acket Radio Service (GPRS), GSM high-speed data (HSCSD), a nd Wireless L ocal Area Netwo rk (WLAN). With the Nokia D 211 you can send and receive e-mai l, text mes sages, data and fax files, and access the Intern et. Note that with the Nokia D211 you cannot make or receive voice calls. The Nokia D211 operates on the GSM 900/1800 networks and IEEE 802.1 1b- c o m p l i a n t W L A N s . I t p l u g s i n t o c o m p a t i b l e p o r t a b l e c o m p u t e r s o r o t h e r d e v i c e s w i t h a t y p e I I o r I I I P C c a r d s l o t . T h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i s e q u i p p e d w i t h a n i n t e g r a t e d smart card r eader: Wired Equivalent Pr ivacy (WEP) keys and personal network p r o f i l e s t h a t m a k e m o v i n g b e t w e e n n e t w o r k s e a s y , c a n b e s t o r e d o n a S I M c a r d . Supported operati ng s ystems a re: Win dows 98 Second Edition, Windo ws Me, Windows 2000, and Win dows XP. For other supported operating systems and software u pdates, please check the Nokia Web site at www.club.nok ia.com . Importa nt! Warning: D o n o t u s e t h e r a d i o c a r d w h e n t h e u s e o f a w i r e l e s s d e v i c e i s prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Note that the radio card may cause similar interference as any cellular device (e. g. mobile phone) a n d m u s t n o t b e u s e d i n a r e a s w h e r e t h e u s e o f a n y s u c h d e v i c e i s p r o h i b i t e d . Warning: B e c a r e f u l w h e n m o v i n g y o u r c o m p u t e r s o t h a t y o u d o n o t c a u s e damage to the protruding end of th e inse rted r adio card. Warning: Using the Nokia D 211 in some cou ntries or regions may be ille gal. Consult local au thorities on the regula tions concerning the use of the Nokia D211. Note: Transmitted dat a is not en crypted by the radio card by d efault. Warning: U s e o n l y a c c e s s o r i e s a p p r o v e d b y t h e r a d i o c a r d m a n u f a c t u r e r f o r u s e w i t h t h i s p a r t i c u l a r r a d i o c a r d m o d e l . T h e u s e o f a n y o t h e r t y p e s m a y invalidate any approval or warranty applyin g to the radio card, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer.
Introd uction 8 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Data and fax c ommunication T h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 p r o v i d e s t h e f u n c t i o n a l i t y o f a w i r e l e s s m o d e m . I n o r d e r t o b e a b l e t o c o n n e c t t o a r e m o t e c o m p u t e r , t o s e n d a n d r e c e i v e f i l e s , e - m a i l a n d f a x e s , a n d to access the Int ernet, you need to take the following points into accoun t: ⢠Y ou need the appropriate dat a and fa x communications software installed on y o u r c o m p u t e r. Y o u c a n u s e t h e N o k i a D 21 1 w i t h a v a r i e t y o f c o m m e r c i a l l y available Windows 9 8 Second Edition, Windows Me, Windows 20 00, and Windows XP compatible data and fax communications applications, such a s Dial-Up Networking and HyperTer minal. ⢠The data and fax commun ications applications must be correctly configured f o r u s e w i t h t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 , a c c o r d i n g t o t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s g i v e n i n t h e documentation of these applications an d your compatible computer . R e m e m b e r t o s e l e c t t h e N o k i a D 21 1 a s t h e m o d e m f o r e a c h a p p l i c a t i o n . ⢠The data transfer and fax functi ons de pend on t he applications you h ave chosen, and not only on the computer or the N okia D 2 1 1. For information on how to use an application, ple ase refer to that applicationâÂÂs d ocumentation. ⢠Y ou need to subscribe to the corresponding data and fax services from you r service provider or net work operator . Contact your service provider for information about the availability and details of the services in your h ome network. Interne t access requires that you have subscribed to the data service and obtained an In ternet access point from your se rvice pr ovider . The Nokia D 211 can also be control led with AT commands. For more information, pleas e r efer to the Developer Manual for Nokia D211 , which can be found at www.for um.nok ia.com . About data transmissi on The Nokia D211 employs the data transmission capabilities of the WLAN and GSM n e t w o r k i n o r d e r t o s e n d a n d r e c e i v e d a t a , t o b r o w s e t h e I n t e r n e t , t o s e n d short messages and e-mai l, and to e stablish connections with othe r compu ters, for example. Data connections may be made from most location s wher e your radio card operates. However, it is recom mended that yo u mo ve the radio card to a locat ion where the strongest possible network signal can be obtained. When the signal is strong, data tra nsmission is more efficient. The following factors may impair wirele ss conn ections: Noise â E l e c t r o n i c a p p l i a n c e s a n d e q u i p m e n t c a n c a u s e r a d i o i n t e r f e r e n c e . A l s o i n areas where radio cards are prevalent, other radio cards can im pair the wir eless connecti on.
Introd uction 9 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Roaming â As the radio card user moves from one WLAN access point coverage area or GSM network cell to another, the signal strength of t he channel drops. As a c o n s e q u e n c e , t h e n e t w o r k m a y h a n d t h e u s e r o v e r t o a c o v e r a g e a r e a a n d frequen cy whe re the s ignal is st ronger. Due to varying netw ork traffic loads, r o a m i n g m a y a l s o o c c u r w h e n t h e u s e r i s s t a t i o n a r y . S u c h r o a m i n g m a y c a u s e slight delays in transm ission. Elec tros tatic discha rge â A d i s c h a r g e o f s t a t i c e l e c t r i c i t y f r o m a f i n g e r o r a conductor may cause erroneo us functions in electri cal devices. The discharge may result in unstable software operation . Network connections may become unreliable, data may become corru pted, and transmis sion halted. In those cases, end the ex isting connection (if any), stop the radio card, a nd remove it from t h e P C c a r d s l o t . T h e n r e - i n s e r t t h e r a d i o c a r d i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t a n d t r y connecting again. Dead spots and d ropouts â D ead spot s are areas where radio si gnals c annot be r e c e i v e d . D r o p o u t s o c c u r w h e n t h e r a d i o c a r d u s e r p a s s e s t h r o u g h a n a r e a w h e r e the radio signal is blocked or reduced by geographical or stru ctural o bstructions, such as concrete w alls. Signal imp airment â D i s t a n c e a n d o b s t a c l e s c a n c a u s e s i g n a l s t o b e c o m e o u t - o f - p h a s e . T h e y c a n a l s o c a u s e r e f l e c t e d s i g n a l s . B o t h s i t u a t i o n s r e s u l t i n a l o s s o f signal strength. Low signal streng th â Due to either distance or obst acles, the r adio si gnal s t r e n g t h f r o m a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t o r G S M c e l l s i t e m a y n o t b e s t r o n g o r s t a b l e enough to provide a reliable connection for communication. Therefore, to ensure the best possible communication, rememb er t o consider the fol lowing points: ⢠Data connection works best when the radio card is in a stationary position . A t t e m p t i n g w i r e l e s s d a t a c o m m u n i c a t i o n w h i l e i n a m o v i n g v e h i c l e i s n o t recommended. F ax transmission is m ore easily impaire d than data or text message transmission. ⢠D o n o t p l a c e t h e r a d i o c a r d o n a m e t a l s u r f a c e . General P acket Radio Service (GPRS) G P R S i s a p a c k e t d a t a t e c h n o l o g y w h e r e i n f o r m a t i o n i s s e n t i n s h o r t b u r s t s o f d a t a o v e r t h e m o b i l e n e t w o r k . T h e b e n e f i t o f s e n d i n g d a t a i n p a c k e t s i s t h a t t h e network is o ccupied only when sending or receiving data. GPRS a s such is a data bearer t hat enable s wireless access to data networks like the Internet . Th e applications that use GPRS are S MS mess aging an d GPRS dial-up (for example , t h e I n t e r n e t a n d e - m a i l ) . B e f o r e y o u c a n u s e G P R S t e c h n o l o g y : ⢠Y ou need t o subscr ibe t o GPRS servi ce. For availability and subscription to GPRS service, contact your service provid er o r n e t w o r k o p e r a t o r.
Introd uction 10 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. ⢠Y ou need to save the GPRS settings for t he applications used over G PRS. See âÂÂMessagesâ on page 3 6 for configurin g tex t message setti ngs. See also âÂÂCreat ing new profiles â on p age 26 a n d â D a t a a n d f a x communicatio nâ on page 8. Please refer to the Data Secur ity d o c u m e n t f o u n d o n t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 C D - R O M f o r information on security issues. Pricing for GPRS and applica tions Both the active GPRS connection and the applications used over GPRS, for example sending and receiving data and text mess ages, are priced . Fo r more detailed information on fees , contact your service provide r or network operator. High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD) The Nokia D211 enables you to use GSM high-speed data se rvices (HSCSD). The standard GSM data transmission rate is 9.6 kbit/s, but HSCSD technology allows for higher data transmission rate s, making, for exampl e, the downloading of large files faster a nd more conven ient. H S C S D t e c h n o l o g y i s b a s e d o n t h e u s e o f m u l t i p l e t i m e s l o t s a t t h e s a m e t i m e . Depending on the network, the data transmission speed in a single timeslot is 9.6 o r 1 4 . 4 k b i t / s . W h e n s e n d i n g a n d r e c e i v i n g e - m a i l , t h e 1 4 . 4 k b i t / s d a t a transmissi on s peed can be doubled u p t o 28.8 kbit/s, and in Internet co nnections a dow nload spee d of up to 43. 2 kbit/s can be achieved if supported by t he equipment o f the netw ork operator and the Int ernet service provider. The use of GSM high-speed dat a se rvices requires that yo ur network s upports HSCSD technology and that you have subscribed to th is service. For m ore information , cont act your servic e pr ovider o r net work ope rator. S e e a l s o â D a t a a n d f a x c o m m u n i c a t i o n â o n p a g e 8 . Please refer to the Data Secur ity d o c u m e n t f o u n d o n t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 C D - R O M f o r information on security issues. Wirel ess Loca l Area Net work (WLAN ) The radio card described in t his document is approv ed for use in a Wireless Local Area Netw ork (WLA N). Warning: T h i s e q u i p m e n t o p e r a t e s a t 2 . 4 - 2 . 4 8 3 5 G H z . N o t e t h a t i n F r a n c e the use of this equ ipme nt is only allowe d at the frequ enc y band of 2 .445 - 2.4835 GHz (channels 10, 11 , 12, and 13).
Introd uction 11 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. The Nokia D211 supports the following WLAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.1 1b standard ⢠D a t a r a t e s o f 1 , 2 , 5 . 5 , a n d 1 1 M b i t / s ⢠Operation at a freque ncy of 2.4 GHz using Direc t S equence Spread Spect rum (DSSS) radio t echnology ⢠Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption with keys u p to 152 bits. The Nokia D211 enables you to wirelessly connect compat ible laptop computers, h a n d - h e l d d e v i c e s , d e s k t o p P C s , a n d o t h e r d e v i c e s w i t h a t y p e I I o r I I I P C c a r d s l o t t o a w i r e d l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k t h r o u g h a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t . I n s t e a d o f c a b l e s , r a d i o w a v e s a r e u s e d t o t r a n s m i t a n d r e c e i v e d a t a o v e r t h e a i r . If you m ove the com puter to an other location within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN access point, the roaming functio nality can automatically connect your computer to another access point that belongs to the same network . As long a s y o u r e m a i n w i t h i n r a n g e o f a c c e s s p o i n t s t h a t b e l o n g t o t h e s a m e n e t w o r k , y o u r c o m p u t e r c a n s t a y c o n n e c t e d t o t h e n e t w o r k . The Nokia D211 ena bles different types of commu nication in a WLAN. There a re two operating modes t o choose from : in frastructu re a n d ad hoc . Infrastructure T h e i n f r a s t r u c t u r e o p e r a t i n g m o d e a l l o w s t w o k i n d s o f c o m m u n i c a t i o n : ⢠W i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h e a c h o t h e r t h r o u g h a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t . ⢠W i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h a w i r e d L A N s t a t i o n t h r o u g h a W L A N access point. The advantage of the infrastructure operating mode is that you can have mor e c o n t r o l o v e r n e t w o r k c o n n e c t i o n s b e c a u s e t h e y p a s s t h r o u g h a n a c c e s s p o i n t . A wireless station can access the services th at are available i n a regu lar wired LAN: compan y databas e, e-mai l, the Internet , and other netw ork reso urces, for examp le. F i g u r e 1 - I n f r a s t r u c t u r e n e t w o r k WLAN access point
Introd uction 12 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Ad hoc In the ad hoc operating mode, wireless stations send and receive data directly w ith each other ; no access poi nt is required. Simply insert the radi o cards into the s t a t i o n s , m a k e t h e n e c e s s a r y c o n f i g u r a t i o n s , a n d s t a r t c o m m u n i c a t i n g . A d h o c netwo rking is ea sy to set up, but comm unicatio n is limited to stations that are w i t h i n r a n g e . A s l o n g a s t h e s t a t i o n s a r e w i t h i n r a n g e , y o u c a n , f o r e x a m p l e , s h a r e and exchange files. See âÂÂSetting up and joining ad hoc networksâ on page 2 2 for how to set up an ad hoc network . SIM services S I M s e r v i c e s r e f e r s t o a s e r v i c e w h i c h e n a b l e s y o u t o a c c e s s t h e I n t e r n e t v i a y o u r service providerâÂÂs or network operatorâÂÂs own public netw ork. Your service provi der may, for exa mple, offer y ou the possibili ty to check data f rom your company i n t r a n e t , s e n d a n d r e c e i v e e - m a i l , a n d s a v e d o c u m e n t s . S I M s e r v i c e s a r e u s u a l l y available in public places such as hote ls, airports, railway stations, business centres, and corporat e buildings. Note: Before you can take advantage of the S IM services, you must subscribe to these serv ices from your service pro vider or network oper ator and obtain instructions for us e. A S I M c a r d i s u s e d a s a m e a n s f o r u s e r i d e n t i f i c a t i o n : t h e d a t a s t o r e d o n t h e S I M card is r ead, and if valid, you are allowe d to c onnect to the Internet and intrane ts. The SIM card is provided by the ser vice prov ider or netw ork operator. Accountin g data, such as used acces s time and/or transferr ed data, is passed from the network on to the serv ice provid er for billing purposes. Accoun ting be gins whe n the wire less s ta tion is a ut hent icat ed and ends when the wireles s stati on logs off. Note: The actual invoice for servic es from your service provider may vary, depending upon network featur es, roun ding-off for billing, taxe s and so f orth. F i g u r e 2 - A d h o c n e t w o r k
Introd uction 13 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Securit y in WLAN Security issues should always be carefully considered to ens ure the secur e transmissi on of data in both wired and wireless LANs. In current wireless systems, for example, WLAN access points need t o authenticate wireless stations to prevent unau thorised acces s t o the net work. Authenticat ion is a service that c o n f i r m s t h e i d e n t i t y o f a n e n t i t y , s u c h a s a u s e r o r a c o m p u t e r , o r c o n f i r m s t h e origin of a transmitted message. The Nokia D211 supports the Wir ed E quivalent Privacy (WEP) protocol, which offers basic protection in WLAN. The W EP protocol utilises the RC4 algorithm with a n u p t o 1 5 2 - b i t s e c r e t k e y , w h i c h e n c r y p t s d a t a b e f o r e i t i s t r a n s m i t t e d o v e r r a d i o w a v e s . W h e n t h e w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s i n a W L A N w i s h t o c o m m u n i c a t e u s i n g W E P , t h e y m u s t h a v e t h e s a m e W E P k e y i n p o s s e s s i o n . T h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i s a l s o c o m p a t i b l e w i t h l e a d i n g V i r t u a l P r i v a t e N e t w o r k ( V P N ) clients over GPRS and WLAN. VPN is recommended for m ore secure network access. The Nokia D 211 is equipped with an int egrated smart card reader. SIM cards an d s m a r t c a r d r e a d e r s p r o v i d e a t o o l f o r m a n a g i n g s e c u r e u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n i n a W L A N . S I M c a r d s a l s o p r o v i d e a n e a s y w a y f o r u s e r s t o c a r r y a n a u t h e n t i c a t i o n d e v i c e w i t h t h e m . O n a S I M c a r d u s e r s c a n s t o r e i m p o r t a n t i n f o r m a t i o n , s u c h a s W E P k e y s a n d n e t w o r k p r o f i l e s . The smart car d reader r eads the data stored on the comp uter chip and sends it to the network for processing. The SIM card is protected by a PIN code; to access the content s of the SIM card, you need to enter the correct PIN code. Cautio n: Keep all miniature SIM cards out of small childrenâÂÂs re ach. Pleas e r efer to the Data Securi ty document found on the product CD-ROM for m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n o n s e c u r i t y i s s u e s . Antennas T h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 h a s b u i l t - i n a n t e n n a s i n s i d e a n e x t e n s i o n b o x . I n t h i s d o c u m e n t antenna r e f e r s t o t h e e x t e n s i o n b o x a n d t h e a n t e n n a s i n s i d e i t . F i g u r e 3 - E x t e n s i o n b o x o f t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1
Introd uction 14 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. W h e n c o n n e c t i n g t o a W L A N , m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e a n t e n n a i s p o i n t i n g t o w a r d s t h e W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t a n d p l a c e d i n a n o p e n a r e a . D o n o t c o v e r t h e a n t e n n a . Use onl y the suppl ied a ntenna. Unauth oris ed ante nnas, mo dific atio ns, or attachments could damage the radio card and may violate regulations governing radio devices.
Installation 15 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Installation T h e r e a r e s o m e s l i g h t d i f f e r e n c e s i n t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p r o c e s s b e t w e e n t h e d i f f e r e n t Windows operating systems. If the installation differs from t he steps described below, follow the instructions on the screen. The Nokia D211 sof tware requires 20 MB of free disk space. Install ing the No kia D2 1 1 software Note: Do not insert the radio car d into your computer until the in stallation program instructs you to do so. 1 E x i t a l l W i n d o w s p r o g r a m s . I n s e r t t h e C D - R O M i n t o t h e C D - R O M d r i v e o f your computer . If the CD-ROM is not la unched automatically , go to y our CD-ROM drive (e.g. drive D) and double-click on St art.exe . 2 Select the language for the CD-ROM and installation program and read through and acce pt the Nokia license agreeme nt. If you do not a ccept the l i c e n s e a g r e e m e n t , y o u c a n n o t u s e t h e C D - R O M . 3 The main screen of t he CD-ROM op ens. Clic k Install to start the in stal latio n. 4 The Welcome p age of the installation w izard opens. Click Next to continue . 5 Read through and accept the Nokia license agreeme nt. If you do not accept the license agreemen t, you cannot use the softwar e a nd the instal lation procedure stops. Click I Ac cept t o a c c e p t t h e l i c e n s e a g r e e m e n t . 6 Select the destina tion folder for the software. The default folder is C:\Program F i l e s \ N o k i a \ N o k i a D 2 1 1 . I f y o u w a n t t o i n s t a l l t h e s o f t w a r e i n a n o t h e r d r i v e o r folder , click Brows e . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e c o r r e c t d e s t i n a t i o n f o l d e r, click Next . Not e: You cannot install the Nokia D211 soft ware on a network drive. 7 S e l e c t t h e t y p e o f i n s t a l l a t i o n y o u w a n t . T h e Admin ist rator option is for system administ rators only. Custom allows you to choose the individual software component s to be in stalled, and is recomme nded f or advanced u sers. Typical installs t he most common software components. This opt ion is r ecommended f o r m o s t u s e r s . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e d e s i r e d t y p e o f i n s t a l l a t i o n , click Next . 8 Check the inst allation settings. To accept them, cli ck Next . To change the settings, click Back , m a k e t h e c h a n g e s , a n d t h e n c l i c k Next . Th e installation program starts copying the files. 9 When the in stallation program pr ompts you to insert the radio card, insert it i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t o f y o u r c o m p u t e r a s s h o w n i n F i g u r e 4 . N o t e t h a t t h e r a d i o
Installation 16 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. c a r d i s n o t i n s e r t e d a l l t h e w a y i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t a n d t h e r e i s a g a p b e t w e e n the protruding exten sion box and the compute r . Do not use excess force when inserting the card. In the Wind ows 2000 operatin g system you are informe d that no dig ital signature was found. Click Yes in each dialog box t o conti nue w ith the installation. In Windows XP , the operating system opens Found New Hardware wizards. For each of these wizards, fi rst select the optio n Instal l the soft ware automatica lly , and then select C ontinue Any way to contin ue with th e installation. 10 The Completion page informs you when the installation is completed. Re move the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive and click Finish . Y ou may need to restart your computer . 11 A dialog box asks if you want t o create a network profile now . Remember that y o u c a n c r e a t e a n d e d i t y o u r o w n n e t w o r k p r o f i l e s a t a n y t i m e . I f y o u d o n o t w a n t t o c r e a t e a p r o f i l e , c l i c k No a n d t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p r o c e d u r e i s c o m p l e t e d . I f y o u w a n t t o c r e a t e a p r o f i l e , c l i c k Yes a n d t h e W e l c o m e w i n d o w of the profile wizard opens. See âÂÂCreating new profilesâ on page 26 f o r m o r e information. Note: If you want ot her applications to be able to use the smart c ard reader o f t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 , y o u n e e d t o i n s t a l l s e p a r a t e l y a P C / S C ( P e r s o n a l C o m p u t e r S m a r t C a r d ) c o m p l i a n t s m a r t c a r d d r i v e r o n y o u r c o m p u t e r . I n s t a l l t h e s m a r t card dr iver only if you want to use ot her applications or special types of s m a r t c a r d s w i t h t h e s m a r t c a r d r e a d e r o f t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 . T o i n s t a l l t h e driver, select Custom as the installa tion type (see step 7 abov e) an d select t he PC/SC smart card drive r compone nt. In the Windows 98 and Me operati ng systems you must hav e the Micros oft Smar t Car d Base Component s 1.0 or later installed. F i g u r e 4 - I n s e r t i n g t h e r a d i o c a r d
Installation 17 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Modi fyin g the in stal lati on You can alter t he in stallation of the Nokia D211 by adding or removing components, for example . 1 E x i t a l l W i n d o w s p r o g r a m s . I n s e r t t h e C D - R O M i n t o t h e C D - R O M d r i v e o f your computer . If the CD-ROM is not la unched automatically , go to y our CD-ROM drive (e.g. drive D) and double-click on St art.exe . 2 Select the language for the CD-ROM and installation program and read through and acce pt the Nokia license agreeme nt. If you do not a ccept the l i c e n s e a g r e e m e n t , y o u c a n n o t u s e t h e C D - R O M . 3 The main screen of t he CD-ROM op ens. Clic k Install to start the in stal latio n. 4 W h e n t h e W e l c o m e p a g e o f t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n m a i n t e n a n c e p r o g r a m o p e n s , choose from the foll owing opt ions: Modify â Y ou can install new com ponents or remo ve existing ones. Update â Y o u c a n u p d a t e t h e i n s t a l l e d c o m p o n e n t s a n d n e t w o r k p r o f i l e s . Uninstall â Y o u c a n r e m o v e t h e N o k i a D 2 11 p r o g r a m f i l e s a n d d r i v e r s f r o m y o u r computer . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e o p t i o n , c l i c k Next . 5 T h e s e l e c t e d w i z a r d o p e n s . M a k e t h e c h a n g e s a n d c l i c k Ne xt t o c o n t i n u e . 6 Check the set tings. To accept them, click Next . To change the setti ngs, click Back , make the changes, and then click Ne xt . 7 The modification starts. The Comple tion page informs you w hen the modification is completed. Click Finis h . Uninstalling the Nokia D2 1 1 software Caution: B e f o r e y o u s t a r t u n i n s t a l l i n g t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 s o f t w a r e , y o u m u s t first stop the radio card and then remove it f rom t he PC card slot of the computer. See âÂÂRemoving th e r adio cardâ on page 22 for more inform ation. Close all dialog boxes in t he use r interface before unin stalling the Nokia D211. To u nins tall the Nok ia D211 software: 1 From the St art menu, select Se ttings and then click Cont rol Pa nel . Click A d d / Remove Programs . 2 F r o m t h e l i s t o f p r o g r a m s , s e l e c t Nokia D211 a n d c l i c k Add/Remove . 3 The Welcome page of the uninstallation wizard opens. If you do not want profiles and sett ings configured on the Settings page removed, select the Keep a l l p r o f i l e s a n d o t h e r s e t t i n g s c h e c k b o x . I f y o u w a n t t o s a v e a l l d a t a r e l a t i n g t o t h e S M S a p p l i c a t i o n , f o r e x a m p l e t e x t a n d p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s y o u h a v e s e n t or receiv ed, selec t the K e e p a l l d a t a f r o m t h e S M S a p p l i c a t i o n check box.
Installation 18 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Click Next t o c o n t i n u e . 4 Check the uninstallation settings. To accept the m, clic k Next . To cha nge the settings, click Back , m a k e t h e c h a n g e s , a n d t h e n c l i c k Next . 5 The uninstallation starts. The Co mpletion page inform s you when the uninstallation is comple ted. Click Finis h .
Getting started 19 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Getting started W i t h t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 y o u c a n : ⢠establish a General Pack et Radio Service (GPRS) connection where information i s s e n t i n s h o r t b u r s t s o f d a t a o v e r t h e c e l l u l a r n e t w o r k . T h e b e n e f i t o f s e n d i n g data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. GPRS is ideal for applications which transmit data in short bursts, such as Web browsers. The data rate can be up to 40.2 kbit/s. Y ou need t o subscribe to the GPRS serv ice. ⢠c o n n e c t t o a G S M n e t w o r k w h e r e y o u c a n s e n d a n d r e c e i v e t e x t a n d p i c t u r e messages. Y ou can also connect to the Internet or your e-mail by making a data c a l l , w h i c h e n a b l e s d a t a t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e s o f u p t o 1 4 . 4 k b i t / s . Y o u c a n m a k e GSM h igh-speed data calls if your netwo rk s upports High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD) t echnology and you have subscribed to GSM h igh- speed data serv ices. H SCSD technolog y is especially suited fo r active file transfer , and the data rate can be up to 43.2 kbit/s. ⢠connec t to a Wirele ss Local Area Network (WLAN) and send and r eceive data like in a regular wired LAN. The data rate in WLAN can be up to 1 1 Mbit/s. Connecting to a netwo rk T o b e a b l e t o c o n n e c t t o a n e t w o r k y o u n e e d a n e t w o r k p r o f i l e . Easy connection profile with pre-def ined settin gs is automatically c reated during softwa re i n s t a l l a t i o n . T h i s p r o f i l e e n a b l e s n e t w o r k a c c e s s w i t h o u t y o u r n e e d i n g t o conf igur e any settin gs. If you want to create a profile yourself, see âÂÂCreatin g new pro files â o n p age 26 for mo re inf orma tion . Y o u n e e d a S I M c a r d t o b e a b l e t o e s t a b l i s h a G S M o r G P R S c o n n e c t i o n . To c reate a network connect ion: 1 Slide the SIM card into the smart card slot of the No kia D21 1. Make s ure that the m etal con ta cts o f the S I M c a r d a r e f a c i n g d o w n a n d t h a t t h e b e v e l l e d c o r n e r i s o n t h e r i g h t . N o t e t h a t t h e r a d i o c a r d d o e s not support 5 V olt SIM c ards.
Getting started 20 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. 2 I n s e r t t h e r a d i o c a r d f i r m l y i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t o f he computer . N o t e t h a t t h e r a d i o c a r d i s n o t i n s e r t e d a l l t h e w a y i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t a n d t h e r e i s a g a p b e t w e e n t h e protruding ext ension box a nd the com puter . Do not use excess force when inserting the card. 3 Switch on your comput er . 4 I f y o u a r e u s i n g a S I M c a r d , e n t e r t h e P I N c o d e a n d c l i c k OK . Y ou can enter the PIN code be fore logging on to a network. 5 During the log on a dialog box opens in the top left-hand corner of the screen. To sele ct the profile and conne ction type at this stage, click Selec t . 6 The Select Connecti on dialog box opens. See Figure 5 . From the list of profile s open the profil e and selec t the conne cti on type you w ant to use. WLAN â C o n n e c t s y o u t o a w i r e l e s s l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k w h e r e y o u c a n s e n d and r eceive dat a. GSM â Allows you to make data calls and utilise GSM high-speed data services if your network supp orts HSCSD techn ology and you have subscribed to the service. GPRS â Yo u c a n e s t a b l i s h a G P R S c o n n e c t i o n a n d s e n d p a c k e t d a t a . Yo u n e e d t o s u b s c r i b e t o t h e G P R S s e r v i c e . OFF â D i s c o n n e c t s t h e r a d i o c a r d f r o m t h e n e t w o r k a n d t u r n s o f f a l l r a d i o s . 7 Click OK to establish a network connection. Fig ure 5 - Select Conne ctio n dialog box
Getting started 21 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Tip: Y ou can acce ss the Select Conne ction dialog box also by r ight-clicking t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i c o n o n t h e t a s k b a r , o r b y o p e n i n g t h e Profil es p a g e o f t h e Manager window and clicking Select . If the t askbar icon is not visible , see page 33 for more info rmation. Tip: Y o u c a n m a n a g e n e t w o r k c o n n e c t i o n s a l s o b y u s i n g t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i c o n on the taskbar. Right-click the icon a nd c lick Connect to conne ct to SIM services. To make a data call, click Dial , and to send packet data, click Activat e . See âÂÂConnection status indicatorsâ below for more information. If the taskbar icon is not visible , s ee pa ge 33 for mo re information. Warning: D o n o t u s e t h e r a d i o c a r d w h e n t h e u s e o f a w i r e l e s s d e v i c e i s prohibi ted or when i t may cause interference or danger. N ote that the radio c a r d m a y c a u s e s i m i l a r i n t e r f e r e n c e a s a n y c e l l u l a r d e v i c e ( e . g . m o b i l e p h o n e ) a n d m u s t n o t b e u s e d i n a r e a s w h e r e t h e u s e o f a n y s u c h d e v i c e i s prohibi ted. Conn ecti on status indica tors Taskbar icons and icons on the Pro files p a g e i n d i c a t e t h e s t a t u s o f t h e n e t w o r k connecti on. Ready for data call â Y ou have establishe d a connection to a GSM network a n d c a n s e n d a n d r e c e i v e t e x t m e s s a g e s . T o a c c e s s t h e I n t e r n e t o r y o u r e - m a i l by us ing GSM high-spee d data services, you need to make a data call. Click Dia l t o m a k e a d a t a c a l l . The use of GSM high-s peed data serv ices requires that your network support s HSCSD technology and that you have s ubscribed to t his se rvice. For m ore information, cont act y our ser vice provider or network ope rator. Data call to [ p h o n e n u m b e r ] â G S M d a t a c a l l i s a c t i v e . T o f i n i s h t h e c a l l , c l i c k End Call . Ready to activa te GPRS â Y ou have e stablished a connect ion t o a GSM network that support s packet data sending (GPRS). Y ou can send and receive t e x t m e s s a g e s . T o a c c e s s t h e I n t e r n e t o r y o u r e - m a i l b y u s i n g G P R S , y o u n e e d to e stablish a GPRS connection. Click Activat e to establish a GPRS connection . Y ou need to subscribe t o the GPRS service. For availabi lity and subscription to packet data services, please contact your serv ice provider or netwo rk operator . GPRS active â G P R S c o n n e c t i o n i s n o w a c t i v e . T o e n d t h e c o n n e c t i o n , c l i c k Deac tivat e . Lin ked to (access p oint name) â You have establi shed a conne ction to a WLAN acc ess point. To connect to the SIM s ervices, click Co nnect . The Connect button is acti vated only whe n the wireles s station has detected a service in the network, ot herwise the button remains inacti ve.
Getting started 22 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Conne cted to SIM serv ices â Y o u h a v e e s t a b l i s h e d a c o n n e c t i o n t o S I M services. To end the conne ction, click Disconnec t . B e f o r e y o u c a n t a k e a d v a n t a g e o f t h e S I M s e r v i c e s , y o u m u s t s u b s c r i b e t o the se se rvic es fro m you r serv ice provi de r or net work opera to r and obt ai n instructions for u se. A d h o c n e t w o r k â Y ou have either established or joi ned an ad hoc network. No network â Y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d Off as a connection type and ar e not conne cted to any networ k. Setting up and joining ad hoc networks A d h o c n e t w o r k s a l l o w w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s t o c o m m u n i c a t e d i r e c t l y w i t h e a c h o t h e r w i t h o u t a n y W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t s . T h e s t a t i o n s c a n , f o r i n s t a n c e , s h a r e f o l d e r s . O n e user creates the ad hoc network and other users then join the ne twork. See âÂÂWireless Local Area Network (WLAN)â on page 1 0 for more information on ad hoc network s. To c onnect to an ad hoc network: 1 On the Pro files page, select the General t a b a n d c l i c k Select . 2 The Sel ect Connecti on dialog box opens. Open the Easy connecti on prof ile and select the W LAN (ad hoc) connection type. Click OK . 3 If you are star ting an ad hoc networ k, type the network name. If you are joining a network, select the network name from the list box. C lick OK . Tip: Create your own profile for a d hoc networking with the profile w izard if you use the ad hoc operating mode freque ntly. This saves you from having to s e l e c t a n e t w o r k e a c h t i m e a n d a l l o w s f o r q u i c k e r a c c e s s . S e e âÂÂCreating new profil esâ on page 26 for more information. Ending netwo rk connectio ns Closing the Mo nitor or Manager window does not quit the progr am or end an existin g n etwork connection. To end a connection, select the connection type Off for a profile . See Figure 5 on page 20. You can end the network connection also by stopping and removing the radio card. Removing the radio card You should always stop the radio card before removing it from the PC card slot of your computer. To stop the card, right-click the Nokia D211 icon on the t askbar
Getting started 23 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. and s elect the option Stop card . I f t h e t a s k b a r i c o n i s n o t v i s i b l e , s e e p a g e 3 3 f o r more informat ion. Caution: The Windows 98 Second Edition operating system stops all PC cards w h e n a n e w P C c a r d i s i n s e r t e d i n t o t h e c o m p u t e r . I f y o u i n s e r t a n o t h e r P C c a r d i n t o y o u r c o m p u t e r , m a k e s u r e t h a t y o u f i r s t s t o p t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 a n d r e m o v e i t f r o m t h e P C c a r d s l o t . O t h e r w i s e y o u m a y l o s e t h e n e t w o r k connection, which may result in loss of data.
Nokia D211 f eatures 24 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Nokia D2 1 1 features Manager and Monitor window The user interface of the Nokia D211 consists of t he Monitor window and the Manager window. T h e M a n a g e r w i n d o w i s t h e m a i n u s e r i n t e r f a c e o f t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 . Y o u c a n a c c e s s the Manager window by right-clicking the Nokia D211 icon on t he taskbar and by s e l e c t i n g M a n a g e r w i n d o w f r o m t h e s h o r t c u t m e n u . I f t h e t a s k b a r i c o n i s n o t visible, see page 33 for more informati on. The Manager window consists of the following pages: Profiles, Setting s, and Tools. The Administrator page is used by system administrators. The number of page s may vary depe nding on which pages were sele cted during the install ation. You can v i e w t h e d i f f e r e n t p a g e s b y c l i c k i n g t h e i c o n s o n t h e i c o n b a r o n t h e l e f t . The Manager wind ow is us ed for managing profiles, configuring settings, and viewing network status. F i g u r e 6 - M a n a g e r w i n d o w
Nokia D211 f eatures 25 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Usin g t he Monito r w ind ow The Monitor window is a small window displaying information on the current network connectio n. The followin g inf ormation is a vailabl e in the Monitor window: connection type, amount of sent and re ceived data, duratio n of the connection, signal strength or WLAN connection quality, and data flow. To open the Monitor window, right-click the Nokia D211 icon on the taskbar and select Mo nitor window . I f t h e t a s k b a r i c o n i s n o t v i s i b l e , s e e p a g e 3 3 f o r m o r e information . If you want the Monitor window to open automatically each time t he radio card is inserted, go to the Setting s p a g e , Genera l t a b . S e l e c t t h e Open Monito r w indow autom atically option. The Monitor window displays both the amount of sent and receive d data, and the d u r a t i o n o f t h e a c t i v e c o n n e c t i o n . T h e d a t a c o u n t e r u n i t i s a k i l o b y t e . W h e n t h e data counter is display ed, click on it and the connection timer is displayed instead. Note: T h e a c t u a l i n v o i c e f o r c a l l s a n d s e r v i c e s f r o m y o u r s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r m a y vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for b illing, taxes and so f orth. The signal strength indicator shows the strength and quality of the radio signal b e t w e e n t h e r a d i o c a r d a n d a G S M b a s e s t a t i o n a t y o u r c u r r e n t l o c a t i o n . I n W L A N , the indicator shows the quality of the radio signal between a radio card and a WLA N ac ces s po int . Re mem ber t hat the stren gth o f th e rad io s igna l i s af fec ted by distance and obstacles. The data flow indicator shows the relative speed at which data is transf erred. Profiles pa ge A profile is a group of networ k-specific and Windows networkin g setti ngs. Profiles enabl e easy transfer from one network to anothe r withou t havin g to rem ember all the diffe rent settin gs. On the Profiles page you can create new profiles, modify and delete them. Profiles can b e sav ed to and ope ned fr om a file. You can also s end profiles as text messages. Profiles are store d on a har d disk or SIM card. One profile with pre-defined settings is automatically created during softwa re installation. This Easy conne ction p r o f i l e e n a b l e s n e t w o r k a c c e s s w i t h o u t y o u r F i g u r e 7 - M o n i t o r w i n d o w
Nokia D211 f eatures 26 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. needing to confi gure any settings. Note that this profile cannot be edited, deleted, exporte d, or sen t as a text message. Selecti ng a profile and connecti on type You need to select a network profile and connection type suitable for the network in which y ou want the radio card to operate. 1 On the Pro files page, select the General t a b a n d c l i c k Select . 2 The Sel ect Connecti on dialog box opens. See Figure 5 on page 20 . From the list of profiles open the profile and select the connection type you want to use. Click OK . If you selected WLAN conn ection type, you are now connected to a WLAN access point. To connect to SIM serv ices, click Co nnect . If you selected GSM or GPRS c onnection type, you are connec ted to a GSM n e t w o r k , b u t t o m a k e a d a t a c a l l y o u h a v e t o c l i c k Dial, o r t o s e n d p a c k e t d a t a you have to click Activate . I f y o u s e t t h e c o n n e c t i o n t y p e t o Off , the radio card is disconnec ted f rom the network. See âÂÂConnection status indicatorsâ on page 2 1 for a detailed desc ript ion of t he vario us netw ork stat uses. Tip: You can access the Sel ect C onne ction dialog box also by right -clicking t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i c o n o n t h e t a s k b a r . I f t h e t a s k b a r i c o n i s n o t v i s i b l e , s e e page 33 for mor e infor mation. Tip: Y ou c an m an age net wo rk co nne cti ons a ls o by us ing the No kia D211 ic on o n t h e t a s k b a r . R i g h t - c l i c k t h e i c o n a n d c l i c k Co nnect to connect t o SIM services. To make a data call, click Dial , and to se nd packet data, clic k Activa te . See âÂÂConnec tion s tatus indicatorsâ on page 21 for more informat ion. If the tas kbar i con i s no t v isible, see page 33 for m ore information. Note: W h e n y o u c h a n g e a p r o f i l e o r c o n n e c t i o n t y p e , y o u m a y n e e d t o change your W eb browserâÂÂs proxy se ttings or domain settings for Windows networki ng. Crea ting n ew profile s By cr eating different profiles for diffe rent networks, you can easily switch from one netwo rk to another witho ut having to memorise the n etwor k settings. 1 On the Pro files page, select the Modify t a b a n d c l i c k New . 2 The Welcome page of the profile wizard open s. T o continue, c lick Next . 3 Give a name for the ne w profile . The name can consist of a maximum of 25 alphanumer ic ch aracters. Select the appropriate connection type. Y ou can use more than one connection type with each profile. Click Next .
Nokia D211 f eatures 27 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. 4 If you selected WLAN conn ection type, you hav e to specify the following WLAN options: Operating mode â S e l e c t o n e o f t h e t w o a v a i l a b l e o p e r a t i n g m o d e s . I n t h e infrast ructure mode, computers can communicate with each othe r and with w i r e d L A N s t a t i o n s t h r o u g h a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t . I n t h e a d h o c m o d e , computer s can send and receive data directly wit h ea ch oth er . No access point is nee ded. See âÂÂWirele ss Local Area Network (WLAN)â o n page 1 0 for more informa tion. Network name â T y p e t h e n e t w o r k n a m e a s d e f i n e d b y t h e s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r, o r s e l e c t o n e f r o m t h e l i s t b o x . I n t h e a d h o c o p e r a t i n g m o d e , the users themselve s name the WLAN . The network name can consis t of a m a x i m u m o f 3 2 a l p h a n u m e r i c c h a r a c t e r s . B y d e f a u l t , t h e n e t w o r k n a m e i s case-sensit ive. T o c o n t i n u e , c l i c k Next . 5 If your local area network does not have a D HCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server , whi ch woul d assign an IP a ddress for t he radio card automatically , you need to specify t he IP addr ess, s ubnet mask, and default gat eway settin gs man ually . Ask yo ur syst em admi nist rat or fo r the corre ct values. Note: M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e Manage TCP/IP proper ties toget her with profil es c h e c k b o x i s s e l e c t e d ( Setti ngs p a g e , Gener al t a b ) . I f t h i s c h e c k box is not se lected , th e T CP/I P s etti ngs are man aged by netw ork se ttings , which can be confi gured in the Control Panel o f your computer. 6 I f y o u s e l e c t e d G S M c o n n e c t i o n t y p e , y o u h a v e t o s p e c i f y t h e f o l l o w i n g settin gs: GSM conne ction me thod â S e l e c t Analog if yo u are using a modem connec tion. If you are us ing an ISDN con nection, se lect ISDN V. 110 o r IS DN V. 120 , depending on which ISDN standard your Inte rnet service pr ovider supports. GSM connection speed â T h e u s e o f G S M h i g h - s p e e d d a t a s e r v i c e s i n c l u d e t h e u s e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g d a t a t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e s : 9 . 6 k b i t / s , 1 4 . 4 k b i t / s , 1 9 . 2 k b i t / s , 28.8 kbit/s, and 4 3.2 kbit/s. Select the st andard 9 .6 kbit /s GSM data transmissio n rate if the network you are using does not suppor t HSCSD technology. See âÂÂGSM propert iesâ on page 30 for more inform ation on data transmissio n r ates. Note: The use of GSM high-s peed dat a service s require s that your network supports H SCSD technology and that you have subscrib ed to this s e r v i c e . G S M h i g h - s p e e d d a t a s e r v i c e s m a y c o s t m o r e t h a n n o r m a l G S M data services. Contact your service provider or network operator for more informat ion. Dial-up connect ion â Select a dial-u p connectio n from the list or create a new dial-up connection. Dial-up networking connects you to remote networks using your radio card as a modem or I SDN adapt er . T o c o n t i n u e , c l i c k Next .
Nokia D211 f eatures 28 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. 7 If you sel ected GPRS conne ction type, you have to specify the GPRS access p o i n t n a m e . Yo u o b t a i n t h e a c c e s s p o i n t n a m e f r o m y o u r s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r o r network operator . If you select Use access point p rovi ded by network , the network will connect you to an available GPRS access point automati cally if this feature is su pported by the network . Click Next . 8 T h e C o m p l e t i o n p a g e o f t h e p r o f i l e w i z a r d i n f o r m s y o u w h e n t h e c r e a t i o n o f a new profile is com pleted. Click Finish . T o t a k e t h e n e w p r o f i l e i n t o u s e , y o u m u s t f i r s t s e l e c t i t . S e e â S e l e c t i n g a p r o f i l e and c onnection typeâ on page 2 6 for more information. Edit ing profil es 1 On the Profil es p a g e , s e l e c t t h e Modify t a b a n d t h e n s e l e c t a p r o f i l e f r o m t h e list. Click Edit . 2 M a k e t h e n e c e s s a r y c h a n g e s a n d c l i c k OK . Profile-specific settings that can be modified are e xplained on pages 28 â 32. The Easy con nection p r o f i l e a n d p r o f i l e s t h a t a r e s a v e d t o a S I M c a r d c a n n o t be edited. Note: It is rec ommended that you do not edit a profile that is currently in use. WLAN properties: G eneral tab Use W LAN connect ion with thi s p rofi le Select this check box if you want to use the profile for accessing a WLAN . Opera ting mode Select one of the two available operating modes. In the infrastructure mode, computer s can communicate with each othe r and with w ired LAN s tations through a WLAN access poin t. In the ad hoc mode, computer s can send and recei ve d ata di rectly with ea ch other. No access point is need ed. See â Wireless L o c a l A r e a N e t w o r k ( W L A N ) â o n p a g e 1 0 f o r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n . Network name Networ k name is t h e n a m e o f t h e W L A N a s d e f i n e d b y t h e s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r . I n the ad h oc operating mode, the users themselves name the WLAN. Y ou can add a new network name to the list, edit an existi ng one, or delete a name. The network n a m e c a n c o n t a i n a m a x i m u m o f 3 2 c h a r a c t e r s , a n d i s c a s e - s e n s i t i v e b y d e f a u l t . Conf igure settin gs manuall y There are a number of advance d WLAN setting s (fr agmentation thresho ld, listen interval, RTS threshold, security poli cy, etc.), which are conf igured automatically. Select this check box and click Ad vanced if you want to specify a new value manually.
Nokia D211 f eatures 29 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Caution: Do not change the settin gs manually unless you are sure how each setting a ffect s syst em performance. System performance may drop dramatically if au tomatic settings ar e not u sed. By de fault, you are automatically alloc ated an available radio frequen cy channe l witho ut n eedin g t o sp ecif y on e. Yo u ca n, h owev er, also selec t a par ticu lar c hann el yourself: select Chan nel from the list of propertie s, clear the Automatic check box a n d s e l e c t a c h a n n e l f r o m t h e l i s t . M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 a n d t h e W L A N access point are using th e s ame c hannel. Warning: Using the Nokia D211 in some countries or regions may be illegal. Consult local authorities on the regulations concernin g the use of the Nokia D211. Warning: T h i s e q u i p m e n t o p e r a t e s a t 2 . 4 - 2 . 4 8 3 5 G H z . N o t e t h a t i n F r a n c e the use of this equi pme nt is only allo wed at the frequen cy b and of 2.445 - 2.4835 GHz (channels 10, 11, 12, a nd 13). Use WEP s ecurity Select this check box and click WEP Keys if you want to use Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) keys f or protecting the inform ation transmitte d in WLAN. See âÂÂWEP securit yâ on page 42 for mo re information. WLAN propert ies: TCP/IP tab A u t o m a t e d I P s e t t i n g s ( D H C P ) a r e e n a b l e d b y d e f a u l t . W h e n u s i n g D H C P ( D y n a m i c Host Configuration Protocol), you do not have to modify your IP setting s when you change your location. I f y o u r l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k d o e s n o t h a v e a D H C P s e r v e r , w h i c h w o u l d a s s i g n an IP address for the radio card automat ically, you need to specify the IP addresses manually. The advance d TCP/IP settings can also be specified and c onfigured manually. Ask your sys tem adminis trator for the corr ect valu es. WLAN properties: SIM Services tab Use SIM servic es w ith this profile SIM services refers to a service that enables you to acce ss t he Internet via you r service providerâÂÂs or network operatorâÂÂs own public netw ork. Your service provi der may, for example , offer you the possibility of c hecking data from your company i n t r a n e t , s e n d a n d r e c e i v e e - m a i l , a n d s a v e d o c u m e n t s . S I M s e r v i c e s a r e u s u a l l y available in public places such as hote ls, airports, railway stations, business centres, and corporat e buildings. A SI M card is used as a means for user identification and billing. The SIM card is provided by the service provider or netwo rk opera tor. Note: B e f o r e y o u c a n t a k e a d v a n t a g e o f S I M s e r v i c e s , y o u m u s t s u b s c r i b e t o these services from your service provider or network ope rator and obtain inst ru cti on s for use .
Nokia D211 f eatures 30 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Service prov ider domain Type the domain name, as in company.com . You cann ot connect to SIM services without specif ying the doma in name. Y ou o btain the name fr om your service provider or network operator . Prom pt w hen a SI M service i s detected W h e n y o u a r e c o n n e c t e d t o a W L A N a n d a S I M s e r v i c e i s d e t e c t e d , y o u a r e a s k e d whethe r yo u want to get c onnecte d. On ce you have confirmed that you want to get c onnected, you will be authenticated to the service. Enable advanced connecti on controll ing Your wireless station sends kee p-alive sign als on a periodic basis to an acce ss controller in order to check the validity o f the connection. If the wirele ss station receiv es n o r esponse, the connectio n is ended automatically. If you sel ect t his check box, your wireless station and the access controller can exchange additional s i g n a l s , w h i c h e n a b l e s a q u i c k e r d e t e c t i o n o f l o s t c o n n e c t i o n . GSM prop erties Note: T h e u s e o f G S M h i g h - s p e e d d a t a s e r v i c e s r e q u i r e s t h a t y o u r n e t w o r k supports the HSCSD techn ology and that you have subscribed t o this service. G S M h i g h - s p e e d d a t a s e r v i c e s m a y c o s t m o r e t h a n n o r m a l G S M d a t a services. Contact your service provider for more information. R e m e m b e r t o s e l e c t t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 a s t h e m o d e m i n e a c h d a t a a n d f a x communicati ons application. Note that the modem sett ings have to be separ ately changed in each application. Use GSM connecti on with this profile Select this check box if you want to use the profile for making data calls. When you have an active data call, you can access the Internet an d send and receive e- mail, for example. GSM conne ction method Select the appropriate data call type. Select Analog if you are using a modem c o n n e c t i o n . I f y o u a r e u s i n g a I S D N c o n n e c t i o n , s e l e c t IS DN V .110 o r ISDN V.120 , depending on whi ch ISDN standard your service provider supports. Con tact your servic e prov ider for more info rmat ion on which rem ote ISDN connecti ons a re supported. GSM conne ction speed Select the data tr ansmission speed. The num ber of timesl ots used is indicated in parenthesis and the receiving transm ission rate is mentioned first . 9.6 KBI T/S (1 1) T h e s t a n d a r d G S M d a t a t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e . S e l e c t t h i s o p t i o n i f the network you are using does not support HSCSD technolog y, or yo u have problems wit h making a data call.
Nokia D211 f eatures 31 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. HSCSD techno logy allows for the use of multiple timeslots d uring a data connection. Data transfer is symmetric when the sending a nd receiving t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e s a r e t h e s a m e , f o r e x a m p l e 2 t i m e s l o t s 2 t i m e s l o t s . S y m m e t r i c d a t a t r a n s f e r i s i d e a l f o r w o r k i n g w i t h e - m a i l . D a t a t r a n s f e r i s a s y m m e t r i c w h e n t h e r e c e i v i n g t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e i s h i g h e r t h a n t h e s e n d i n g t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e , f o r example 3 timeslots 1 timeslot. This is ideal for downloading Web pages or files. Due t o the natur e of the netw ork, dat a transm issio n rates may change du ring a data c onnection. You can see the recei ving and sending data t ransmission rate s on the Profil es page under the Operating informatio n a r e a . Dial-up connectio n S e l e c t a d i a l - u p c o n n e c t i o n f r o m t h e l i s t o r c r e a t e a n e w d i a l - u p c o n n e c t i o n u s i n g the Windows d ial-up wizard. D ial-up networking connects you to remote networks using your radio card as a modem or ISDN adapter. GPRS properties Use GPRS connectio n with this profi le Select this check box if you want to use the profile for sending and receivi ng packet data. Use access point provid ed by network Select this if you want the network to select a GPRS acces s poi nt for you. The network will connect you to an available G PRS access p oint autom atically if this feature is suppor ted by the network . 14.4 KBIT/S (1 1) Can be used if it is supported by the network. Do not u se this option un less you are sure your network supports it. 19.2 KBIT/S (2 2) Doubles the standard 9.6 kbit/s GSM da ta transmission rate. Y ou can select this option if your network supports HSCSD technology and you have subsc ribed to GSM high-speed d ata services. 28.8 KBIT/S (2 2) T r i p l e s t h e 9 . 6 k b i t / s t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e , o r d o u b l e s t h e 1 4 . 4 k b i t / s t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e . T h i s o p t i o n i s i d e a l f o r w o r k i n g with e-mail. Y ou can select this option if your network supports HSCSD technology and you have subsc ribed to GSM high-speed d ata services. 43.2 KBIT/S (3 1) Triples the 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate. This option is ideal for downloading W eb pages since th e radio card receive s data faster than it sends data. Y ou can select this option if your network supports HSCSD technology and you have subsc ribed to GSM high-speed d ata services.
Nokia D211 f eatures 32 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Specify access point name ma nually If you obtain the GPRS access poin t name from your ser vice provider or network operator, select this check box and type the name. An access point name is nee ded t o e s t a b l i s h a c o n n e c t i o n t o a G P R S n e t w o r k . Remo ving p rofi les On the Profile s page, select the Modify tab a nd then select a profile from t he list. Click Delete . The Easy con nection p r o f i l e c a n n o t b e d e l e t e d . Profiles that are store d on a SIM card c an on ly be removed by the system administ rator. Importi ng and exporti ng profi les On the Profiles p a g e , s e l e c t t h e Modify t ab an d the n cli ck Impo rt . Sel ec t the folder from which you want to im port a profile. Similarly, you can save a profile in a folder. Click Export , and select the folder where you w ant to save th e prof ile. The Easy con nection p r o f i l e c a n n o t b e e x p o r t e d . The system adminis trator can impor t profil es from and export profiles to a SIM card. Send ing a pr ofil e a s a t ext messag e Make sure you have either a GSM or GPRS connection type selected. You cann ot s e n d o r r e c e i v e t e x t m e s s a g e s w h e n c o n n e c t e d t o a W L A N . The Easy con nection p r o f i l e c a n n o t b e s e n t a s a t e x t m e s s a g e . 1 On the Profiles page, selec t the Modify t a b a n d s e l e c t t h e p r o f i l e y o u w a n t t o send as a text message. Click Send . 2 The S e n d P r o f i l e V i a S M S dialog box opens. Type the phone num ber of the recipient in the box or click Se lect a n d s e l e c t i t f r o m t h e l i s t o f c o n t a c t s s t o r e d on y our SIM card. The dial-up connect ion that has been specified for t he profile is sent automatically with the profile. Dial-up connections are needed when you want t o m a k e a d a t a c a l l ( G S M c o n n e c t i o n ) o r s e n d p a c k e t d a t a ( G P R S c o n n e c t i o n ) . 3 Click Send t o s e n d t h e t e x t m e s s a g e . Note: A profile may be made up of several text messages. Therefore , sending one profile m ay c ost more than sending one te xt m essage.
Nokia D211 f eatures 33 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Settings page On the Settings page you can set properties that are common for all profiles. Thes e settin gs will remain unchanged even when you switch to using another profile or c o n n e c t i o n t y p e . T h e G S M a n d W L A N s e t t i n g s a p p l y t o c o r r e s p o n d i n g c o n n e c t i o n types only. For the changes to take effect, click the Ap ply button. If you have made chan ges t o t h e s e t t i n g s b u t h a v e n o t y e t c l i c k e d Apply a n d w i s h t o r e s t o r e t h e p r e v i o u s settings, click Restore . Gene ral sett ings (Gene ral tab) Manage TCP/IP proper ties togeth er with profil es B y d e f a u l t , T C P / I P s e t t i n g s a r e m a n a g e d a s d e f i n e d i n e a c h p r o f i l e . When the Ma nag e TCP/IP prope rties t ogethe r with profil es c h e c k b o x i s cleared, profiles will be activated without TCP/IP settings. Y ou can change the settings manually in the Control Pane l of your computer. Do not esta bli sh netw ork conn ect ion a uto ma tical ly When this check box is selected, the Select Connecti on dialog box opens automa tically w hen you star t your c ompute r o r in sert the radio card . In the dialog b o x y o u c a n s e l e c t t h e c o n n e c t i o n t y p e y o u w a n t t o u s e . T h e d e f a u l t c o n n e c t i o n type is Off . See Figure 5 on page 2 0. If you clear t his check bo x, every time you start your co mputer or insert the radio card, the connection that was last used is established automatically. Warning: It is recommende d t hat you have this check b ox s elected. It can prevent you from accidentally establishing a network connection in areas wh ere the use of wire les s device is prohibi ted or w hen it may cause interf erence or danger. Alert when connectio n status c hanges I f t h i s c h e c k b o x i s s e l e c t e d , y o u h e a r a n a l e r t t o n e e v e r y t i m e t h e s t a t u s o f t h e netw ork co nne ction chang es. Open Monitor window automa tically W h e n y o u i n s e r t t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i n t o y o u r c o m p u t e r , a s m a l l i c o n a p p e a r s o n t h e taskbar. By right -clicking this icon a shortcut menu opens, and you can access t he Monitor window from there. If, howe ver, you w ant the Mon itor wi ndow to open a u t o m a t i c a l l y e a c h t i m e t h e c a r d i s i n s e r t e d , s e l e c t t h e Open Monitor w indow automaticall y o p t i o n . Show icon on taskbar I f y o u s e l e c t Show icon on taskbar , a small Nokia D 211 icon will be displayed on the ta skbar when ever th e rad io card is inser ted. If you clear th is ch eck bo x, you can access the u ser i nter face o f the N okia D211 fro m the Start menu (Start, Programs, N o k i a , N o k i a D 2 1 1 ) .
Nokia D211 f eatures 34 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Exit program when card is removed If this check box is selec ted, you automatically exit the program when you remov e the radio card from the wireless station. Basic GSM settings (GSM tab) Automatic ne twork select ion T h e G S M n e t w o r k t o w h i c h y o u r r a d i o c a r d i s c o n n e c t e d c a n b e s e l e c t e d e i t h e r manually or automatically. If the Automatic network selection check box is selected, the radio card automatically sele cts one of the ce llular networ ks available i n your area. Outside of the home network service area, the radio card will se lect one of the ne tworks that have a roam ing agreement w ith the home network. To select a network manually, c lear the Automatic network selection check box and c lick Searc h Networks . S e l e c t a n e t w o r k f r o m t h e l i s t o f a v a i l a b l e n e t w o r k s and click OK . I f t h e r a d i o c a r d c a n n o t r e a c h t h e s e l e c t e d n e t w o r k o r l o s e s c o n t a c t w i t h i t , y o u a r e p r o m p t e d t o s e l e c t a n o t h e r n e t w o r k . Note: If you select any othe r than your home network, this network must h a v e a r o a m i n g a g r e e m e n t w i t h y o u r h o m e n e t w o r k o p e r a t o r . Voice m ailbox numbe r Type your voi ce ma ilbox nu mber in this box. You obtain this numb er fro m your service provider or network ope rator. Displa y cell inf o You can set the radio card to i ndicate w hen it is used in a cellular n etwork base d on Micro Cellular Network ( MCN) technology. Displa y incoming calls When this ch eck box is selected, you will get a not ification when you have a call (data, fax) coming i n. Adva nced G SM setting s (GSM t ab) A number of advanc ed GSM settings are network services : before you can benefit f r o m t h e s e s e r v i c e s , y o u m u s t s u b s c r i b e t o t h e m f r o m y o u r s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r o r network operator and obtain inst ructions on t heir u se. To access these settings, select the Settings page and GSM tab. Click Ad vance d Sett ings . Call Divert Call div erting is a network s ervice that al lows you to direct incoming voice, data and f ax calls to, for e xample, your voice mailbox number.
Nokia D211 f eatures 35 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. To set the call diverts: 1 On the Settin gs page, select the GSM t a b a n d c l i c k Adv anced S ettings . 2 The Advanced GSM Setting s dialog box opens. Select the C all Div ert t a b. 3 From the Call type l i s t , s e l e c t t h e c a l l t y p e y o u w a n t t o b e d i v e r t e d ( v o i c e , data, or fax). 4 Click Ch eck Status to check whether the divert is activated or not. To set the d i v e r t s e t t i n g o n , c l i c k Change . 5 S e l e c t w h e r e y o u w a n t t o d i r e c t y o u r i n c o m i n g c a l l s a n d t y p e t h e p h o n e number . Click OK . 6 Click OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog box. To cancel all the a ctive call diverts at onc e, c lick Cancel All Diverts . To canc el only one call type divert, click Cha nge a nd select Dea ctivate i n t h e Divert to list. Note: Make sure you have either t he GSM or GPRS connection type selected when setting call diverts or ch ecking the stat us. When conn ected to WLAN, you cannot configure the se settings. Call Barring Call barring is a network service that allows you to restric t incoming and outgoing calls so that calls c annot be received or made. Activating call barring or cha nging t he barring settings requires the barring password, which you obtain from your se rvice provider o r networ k operat or. See âÂÂTo change acces s co desâ on page 38 for information on how to change the barring password. To s et call barring options: 1 On the Settin gs page, select the GSM t a b a n d c l i c k Adv anced S ettings . 2 The Advanced GSM Setting s dialog box opens. Select the Call Barring t a b . 3 From the Call type list, selec t the c all type you want to bar (voice, d ata, f ax, or messages). 4 Click Ch eck Status t o a s k t h e n e t w o r k f o r t h e c a l l b a r r i n g s t a t u s . T o s e t a b a r r i n g s e t t i n g o n , c l i c k Activa te . 5 Ty pe your barring password and click OK . 6 Click OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog box. To disable all call barrings, click Cancel All Barring s . To disable only one call type barring, click Deactiva te . Note: Make sure you have either t he GSM or GPRS connection type selected w h e n s e t t i n g c a l l b a r r i n g o p t i o n s o r c h e c k i n g t h e s t a t u s . W h e n c o n n e c t e d t o WLAN, you cann ot conf igure these se ttings.
Nokia D211 f eatures 36 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Messages W i t h t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 y o u c a n s e n d a n d r e c e i v e t e x t a n d p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s . S e e âÂÂNokia Short Messagingâ on pa ge 46 for more information. Any changes th at you make to m essage settings affect the way in which your messages are sent and received. The availability of so me of the settings d epends on the ser vice provider or ne twork operator. SMS application in use S e l e c t t h e S h o r t M e s s a g e S e r v i c e ( S M S ) a p p l i c a t i o n y o u w a n t t o u s e f o r s e n d i n g and r eceiving messages. The Nokia D211 includes the Nokia Short Messaging application. Message centre number You need the message centre number to se nd messages. You receive the number from your s ervice provider or network operator. Messages sent as T e x t a n d p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s a r e n o r m a l l y s e n t i n t e x t f o r m a t , b u t i t i s p o s s i b l e t o convert them into an alternative form at (e-mail, fax, paging). To be able to receive a conve rted message, the recip ient must have an appropriate device available, and the network must supp ort this feature. Mes sage valid ity If the recipient of a mes sage cannot be reached within the set m essage validity p e r i o d , t h e m e s s a g e i s r e m o v e d f r o m t h e m e s s a g e c e n t r e . I f y o u s e l e c t Maximum , the validity period is set to the maximum time allowed by the network. Reply via same message centre Select this check box if you want to request the network to route the reply to your message via yo ur own message centre . Delivery reports Select this c heck box i f you want to receive delivery reports on the mes sages you have sent. Send long messages If the Se nd long messages check box is sele cted, messages longer than 160 characters are sent a s c oncatenated messages. A concatenate d message is received as one long message if the recipientâÂÂs device supports this function. If this o p t i o n i s n o t s e l e c t e d , m e s s a g e s l o n g e r t h a n 1 6 0 c h a r a c t e r s a r e s e n t a s s e v e r a l normal text messages. Start SMS app lication when message is received Select this check box if you want your SMS application, such a s Nokia Short Messaging, to open automatically when you ha ve rec eived a message.
Nokia D211 f eatures 37 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Use G PRS as p referred SMS bearer You can select whether messages will be sent using GPRS packet dat a wheneve r possible. Soun ds I f y o u w a n t t o b e n o t i f i e d o f a n i n c o m i n g c a l l o r m e s s a g e b y a t o n e , s e l e c t t h e Aler t on inc om ing calls and messages c h e c k b o x . T y p e t h e n a m e o f t h e w a v f i l e in the appropri ate text box or click the Browse b u t t o n a n d s e l e c t t h e f i l e y o u w a n t . B y c l i c k i n g t h e a r r o w b u t t o n y o u c a n l i s t e n t o a n e x a m p l e o f t h e s e l e c t e d w a v f i l e . WLAN settings (WLAN tab) E n a b l e p o w e r s a v i n g Since a radio card has no direct w ire connect ion of its own, it uses power from the host computer. The Nokia D211 is equipped with a pow er saving option that allows you to cont rol the p ower consumption of your computer: you can pro long the life of t he battery whe n neede d. I f y o u s e l e c t t h e Enabl e p ower saving check box, the radio card is fully power ed u p o n l y w h e n s e n d i n g o r r e c e i v i n g d a t a . T h e c a r d w a k e s u p f r o m t h e p o w e r s a v i n g m o d e a t r e g u l a r i n t e r v a l s t o c h e c k i f t h e r e i s a n y d a t a f o r i t a t a W L A N a c c e s s point, and wakes up immediately when there is any outgoing data. Note: The speed of communicat ion decreases when the power saving option is u sed. Note: The power saving option may not be c ompatible with WLAN access p o i n t s t h a t a r e n o t W i - F i ( W i r e l e s s F i d e l i t y ) a p p r o v e d . D o n o t u s e p o w e r saving with such access points. Case-sensitive network n ames B y d e f a u l t , t h e n a m e o f t h e W L A N i s c a s e - s e n s i t i v e . I f y o u d o n o t w a n t t h e network names to b e case-se nsitive, clear this check box. Renew DHCP automatically w hen needed I f t h e n e t w o r k h a s a D H C P s e r v e r a n d y o u w a n t t h e s y s t e m t o a l l o c a t e y o u I P addresses automatic ally, select the Renew DHCP a utomati cally when n eeded check box. You can also renew your IP address whenever you want by clicking the Renew DHCP Now button. Secu rity se tti ngs (Secur ity tab) You can set various access codes and protect your radio card and SIM card against unaut horised use . Codes can only include digits from 0 to 9.
Nokia D211 f eatures 38 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. PIN code request The PIN (Pe rsonal Identificati on Numb er) code is usually supplied wit h the SIM c a r d . I t p r o t e c t s y o u r S I M c a r d a g a i n s t u n a u t h o r i z e d u s e . I f y o u s e t t h e PIN code request o n , y o u a r e a s k e d f o r t h e P I N c o d e w h e n y o u s t a r t t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 program or insert the rad io card , provide d that you have inserted a SIM card into the radio card. Click the Change button to chang e the statu s. Note: Some SI M cards do not allow turning off the PIN code re quest. I f y o u e n t e r a n i n c o r r e c t P I N c o d e t h r e e t i m e s i n a r o w , t h e c o d e i s b l o c k e d a n d t h e S I M c a r d c a n n o t b e u s e d . T o c h a n g e a b l o c k e d P I N c o d e , y o u n e e d a P U K ( P I N Unblocking Key) code. PUK is an 8-digit code supplied with the SIM car d. Secu rity code reques t The security code protects your radio card agains t unauthorised use, and is supplied with the radio card. The prese t code is 12345. Change the preset code and k e e p t h e n e w c o d e s e c r e t a n d i n a s a f e p l a c e s e p a r a t e f r o m y o u r r a d i o c a r d . If you key in an incorrect security code five times in succession, the radio card will n o t a c c e p t t h e c o r r e c t c o d e f o r t h e n e x t f i v e m i n u t e s . To c hange access codes: You can change the PIN co de, se curity code, a nd barring password. Note that changing the b arring passw ord re quires that the call barring servi ce i s activated f o r y o u r S I M c a r d . 1 On the Settin gs page, select the Securi ty t a b a n d c l i c k Change Access Code . 2 The Change Acc ess Code dialog box opens. Select f rom the list the access code you want to change . 3 In the Current code b o x , t y p e t h e c o d e u s e d p r e s e n t l y . 4 In the New cod e box, type the new code. Note: T h e a c c e s s c o d e s m a y o n l y i n c l u d e n u m b e r s f r o m 0 t o 9 . T h e P I N c o d e l e n g t h m u s t b e a t l e a s t f o u r a n d n o m o r e t h a n e i g h t d i g i t s . T h e l e n g t h o f t h e s e c u r i t y c o d e i s a l w a y s f i v e d i g i t s a n d t h e l e n g t h o f t h e ba rrin g pas swo rd is four di gi ts. 5 In the Co nfirm ne w code box, type the new co de again. 6 Click OK to apply the changes and to close t he dialog box . T ool s pag e On t he Tools page you f ind, for example, detaile d infor mation on the n etwork c o n n e c t i o n s , y o u c a n r u n a s e r i e s o f f a u l t d i a g n o s i s t e s t s , a n d y o u c a n c r e a t e personal WEP keys.
Nokia D211 f eatures 39 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Sett ing counte rs On the Co unters t a b y o u c a n v i e w d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e d i f f e r e n t t y p e s o f network connec tions made: nu mber of conne ctions, their duration, and a mount o f d a t a t r a n s m i t t e d . Y o u c a n a l s o s e e h o w m a n y t e x t a n d p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s y o u have sen t and receiv ed. Y o u c a n s e l e c t a p r e - d e f i n e d t i m e p e r i o d f o r w h i c h i n f o r m a t i o n i s s h o w n , o r s e t the start and end time yoursel f. Y o u c a n s a v e t h e i n f o r m a t i o n t o a n h t m l o r a c s v f i l e b y c l i c k i n g t h e Report but ton. To cle ar all counters, click Clear . Note: T h e a c t u a l i n v o i c e f o r c a l l s a n d s e r v i c e s f r o m y o u r s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r m a y vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for b illing, taxes and so f orth. View ing histor y i nfo rmat ion On the Histo ry tab you can monitor vari ous connectio n events. You can sele ct the type of net work and the level of detail to be reported. Y o u c a n s a v e t h e i n f o r m a t i o n t o a n h t m l o r a c s v f i l e b y c l i c k i n g t h e Report but ton. N o t e t h a t o n l y i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t i s c u r r e n t l y o n d i s p l a y i s s a v e d t o a f i l e . T h e f i l e can b e use ful if you need, for example, to contact technical support in problem situations. To remov e all history information, c lick Cl ea r . Diag nosi ng faults On the Diagnostics t a b y o u c a n r u n a s e r i e s o f f a u l t d i a g n o s i s t e s t s t o e n s u r e t h a t the radio card and the software are operating correctly. If you encounte r problems i n a c c e s s i n g a n e t w o r k , f o r e x a m p l e , t h e t e s t s c a n h e l p t o i d e n t i f y t h e s o u r c e o f the problem. The tests check that the software files h ave not been modified, the settin gs conf igur ed both on the Prof iles a n d Settings p a g e s a r e v a l i d a n d d o n o t c o n f l i c t , and all drivers have been installed corre ctly. If the ca rd does not pass the test, you are given advi ce on how to pr oceed. T o s t a r t t h e f a u l t d i a g n o s i s t e s t , c l i c k Start . Y o u c a n s a v e t h e t e s t r e s u l t t o a t e x t f i l e b y c l i c k i n g t h e Report but ton. The te xt file can be useful if you need, for example, to contact tec hnical suppor t in problem situations. Note that the content of this file is in English only. Mana ging p erso nal WE P keys Personal Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) keys are used for authentic ating the user in a WLAN. Personal keys are usually created by the system administrator, who can store them on SIM cards and then distribut e them t o the users. Personal keys can a l s o b e s a v e d t o a f i l e . S i n c e p e r s o n a l k e y s a r e n o t n e t w o r k s p e c i f i c , t h e y c a n n o t b e
Nokia D211 f eatures 40 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. saved together with prof iles. They can, h owever, be saved to a file and used independently from profiles. Personal WEP keys can be used only wit h the infrastruct ure operat ing mode , provided that t he WLAN access point s upports the ke ys. Ad hoc networks use s h a r e d W E P k e y s o n l y . See âÂÂCreating and editing personal WEP keysâ on page 4 4 for more information. Administrator p age The Administrat or page is meant for system administrators and is not installed as part of the normal in stallation procedure. On the Administrato r p age, the syst em a d m i n i s t r a t o r c a n v i e w d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e n e t w o r k c o n n e c t i o n s a n d s a v e important data on a SIM card. The administrato r can create installation disks that include relevant network profiles a nd settings, and that then can be distributed to end users within a corpo ration, for ex ample. Monitor ing informa tion on W LAN On the WLAN t a b y o u c a n v i e w g e n e r a l i n f o r m a t i o n o n v a r i o u s e l e m e n t s o f a W L A N . D e p e n d i n g o n t h e t y p e o f a c c e s s p o i n t i n u s e , t h e d e t a i l s d i s p l a y e d c a n include net work na me, data r ate, channel, signal strength, and IP addres s. Select f rom the following it ems: Access points â In the infrastructure operating mode, shows which WLAN ac cess p o i n t s a r e c u r r e n t l y i n r a n g e a n d a v a i l a b l e . Networ ks â Sh ows all the wirele ss local area netwo rks that can be access ed with the radio card. Wireless stations â I n t h e a d h o c o p e r a t i n g m o d e , t h e n a m e s o f t h e o t h e r computer s connect ed to t he a d hoc network are displaye d. Not e that only the names of those compute rs that are using the Nokia D211 are shown. T o u p d a t e t h e i n f o r m a t i o n o n d i s p l a y , c l i c k Refresh . Viewin g WLAN statisti cs On the Statistics t a b y o u c a n v i e w d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e c o n n e c t i o n between the Nokia D211and the WLAN access point to which you are linked. Both graphical and numeric statistics are given for the following properties: c onnection quality, received signal s trength (RSSI), noise f loor, signal to noise ratio (S NR), Tx retry rate, and data flow. I f y o u w a n t t o s a v e t h e i n f o r m a t i o n t o a t e x t f i l e , c l i c k Sta rt Logging .
Nokia D211 f eatures 41 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Crea ting i nsta llat ion disks The system administr ator can create installation disks that contain all the s o f t w a r e a n d n e c e s s a r y s e t t i n g s n e e d e d f o r a c c e s s i n g n e t w o r k s . T h e c u s t o m installation package fits on a compact disk but can also be saved on a hard disk. The installation disk can be used for distributing profiles. All the desire d settings and profiles can be copied to the installation disk, and the end user does not have t o c o n f i g u r e s e t t i n g s i n o r d e r t o b e a b l e t o c o n n e c t t o a n e t w o r k . To g enerate an installation disk: 1 On the Ad ministrator page, se lect the Insta lla tio n Disk t a b. S e l e c t f r o m t h e following options: Profiles available â T h e l i s t c o n t a i n s t h e n a m e s o f a l l t h e p r o f i l e s f o u n d i n t h e system reg istry. Sele ct th e prof iles tha t you want to i nclude i n the installatio n package. Allow editing o f selected profiles â The administrator can deny the editing of those profiles that are distributed with the installation disk. The u ser can creat e new profi le s. Include smart card dr iver â If you want other applications to be able to use the smart card reader of t he Nokia D211, you need t o install a PC/SC (Personal C o m p u t e r S m a r t C a r d ) c o m p l i a n t s m a r t c a r d d r i v e r . W h e n t h i s o p t i o n i s s e l e c t e d , t h e s m a r t c a r d r e a d e r c a n b e u s e d w i t h o t h e r a p p l i c a t i o n s b e s i d e s t h e Nokia D2 1 1, and with special types of smart car ds. Include basic setti ngs from Settings pa ge â C e r t a i n s e t t i n g s t h a t h a v e b e e n configur ed on the Settings p a g e c a n b e i n c l u d e d i n t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p a c k a g e . These include all settings configured on the Gen eral t ab , GSM tab (no advanced settings s uch as call diverts), and WLAN tab . Th ese settings a re c o m m o n f o r a l l p r o f i l e s . Create one file installation pa ckage â T h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p a c k a g e c o n s i s t s o f o n l y one executabl e file. I t co ntains the necessary files and drivers, a nd is easier to d i s t r i b u t e t h r o u g h e - m a i l , f o r e x a m p l e , t h a n s e v e r a l s e p a r a t e f i l e s . Include Administrator page â T h e e n t i r e Administrato r page is included in the installation package. 2 To start creating an installation d isk wit h the selected profiles and option s, click Create . 3 Select the destination folder and click OK . Mana ging S IM card c ont ents T h e s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r c a n s t o r e i m p o r t a n t i n f o r m a t i o n s u c h a s p e r s o n a l W E P k e y s a n d n e t w o r k p r o f i l e s o n a S I M c a r d . T h e a d m i n i s t r a t o r c a n t h e n g i v e u s e r s S I M c a r d s , w h i c h c o n t a i n t h e n e c e s s a r y n e t w o r k s e t t i n g s a n d e n c r y p t i o n k e y s f o r quick network access.
Nokia D211 f eatures 42 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Transfe rring files from the comp uter to the SIM ca rd an d vice versa is done by using a drag-and-drop operation or by using the Copy , Move , and Delete b utto ns on the SIM Card t a b . For the changes to take effect, click Appl y . Note that the butto n is inactiv e if the re i s n o t e n o u g h f r e e s p a c e o n t h e S I M c a r d . I f y o u h a v e m a d e c h a n g e s b u t w i s h t o resto re the previ ous state , click Restore . Dist ribu ting p rofi les The system adm inistrator can create profiles and then distribute them to end users w i t h i n a c o r p o r a t i o n . T h e r e a r e d i f f e r e n t w a y s f o r d e l i v e r i n g p r o f i l e s : ⢠Installation disks: the system administrator can create installation disks which con tain a ll th e s oft ware and nec ess ary s etti ngs neede d f or a cce ssing net wor ks â in cluding profiles. See âÂÂCreating installation disksâ on page 4 1. ⢠N e t w o r k : p r o f i l e s c a n b e s a v e d t o a f o l d e r o n a n e t w o r k d r i v e f r o m w h i c h t h e end user can import the profile . See âÂÂImport ing and exp orting profilesâ on page 32. ⢠S I M c a r d : t h e s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r c a n s t o r e p r o f i l e s o n S I M c a r d s w h i c h c a n then be dist ributed to e nd users. S ee âÂÂManagin g SIM card contentsâ above. ⢠T e x t m e s s a g e s : p r o f i l e s c a n b e d i s t r i b u t e d b y s e n d i n g a t e x t m e s s a g e t h a t i n c l u d e s a p r o f i l e . S e e â S e n d i n g a p r o f i l e a s a t e x t m e s s a g e â o n p a g e 3 2 . WEP security To in crease the security of communication over the wirele ss local area n etwork, the Nokia D211 o ffers the Wired Equiv alent Privacy (WEP) securit y feature. WEP u s e s t h e R C 4 a l g o r i t h m w i t h a n u p t o 1 5 2 - b i t k e y . T h e a l g o r i t h m p r o v i d e s f o r s e c u r i t y v i a t w o m e t h o d s : a u t h e n t i c a t i o n a n d e n c r y p t i o n . A u t h e n t i c a t i o n i s t h e means b y which one w ireless station is verified to have authorisation to c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h a s e c o n d s t a t i o n i n a g i v e n c o v e r a g e a r e a . In the inf rastructure operating mode, authentication is e stablished between a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t a n d e a c h w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n . I f a w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n r e c e i v e s a p a c k e t t h a t h a s n o t b e e n s c r a m b l e d w i t h a c o r r e c t k e y , t h e p a c k e t i s d i s c a r d e d . Encrypted messages can b e op ened b y othe r radi o cards onl y if they all u se the same encryption key. I n the ad hoc operating mode, authentication is establishe d betwe en each wireless station. T h e l e v e l o f s e c u r i t y i s d e p e n d e n t o n t h e l e n g t h o f t h e k e y : t h e m o r e b i t s t h e r e a r e i n t h e k e y , t h e l o n g e r i t t a k e s t o d e c r y p t t h e i n f o r m a t i o n s e n t a n d t h e h i g h e r t h e level of security. WEP ke ys consis t of a secr et key and a 24-bit Initialization Vector. For ex ample, t h e 1 2 8 - b i t W E P k e y h a s a 1 0 4 - b i t s e c r e t k e y t h a t t h e u s e r c a n s e t , a n d a 2 4 - b i t Initialization Vect or that cannot be cont rolled by t he u ser. Many manufact urers
Nokia D211 f eatures 43 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. r e f e r t o t h i s 1 2 8 - b i t k e y a s a 1 2 8 - b i t k e y , w h e r e a s s o m e r e f e r t o i t a s a 1 0 4 - b i t k e y ( 1 0 4 2 4 ) . B o t h k e y s o f f e r t h e s a m e l e v e l o f e n c r y p t i o n a n d a r e t h e r e f o r e interoperable . Tip: R e g a r d l e s s o f h o w t h e W E P k e y s h a v e b e e n n a m e d , a l l k e y s a r e compatible as long as their length is the same. For example, keys that are 40 b i t s l o n g , a l w a y s c o n s i s t o f 5 a l p h a n u m e r i c c h a r a c t e r s o r 1 0 h e x a d e c i m a l characters. The Nokia D2 11 su pports three key le ngths: 40 (40 24), 128 (1 04 24), and 15 2 ( 1 2 8 2 4 ) b i t s . T h e 4 0 - b i t k e y i s W i - F i ( W i r e l e s s F i d e l i t y ) c o m p a t i b l e . There are t wo types of WEP ke ys: shared keys a n d person al keys . Shared W EP key s Shared WEP keys are shared by all wireless stations using the net work or s u b n e t w o r k ; o n l y s t a t i o n s t h a t h a v e t h e c o r r e c t k e y c a n r e c e i v e a n d d e c r y p t d a t a . T h e s a m e k e y i s l o a d e d i n t o t h e W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t . S h a r e d k e y s a r e u s u a l l y crea ted by system admin ist rato rs, who dist ribu te the m to user s. Shared keys are ne twork-specific, an d e ach networ k can have a ma ximum of four d i f f e r e n t s h a r e d k e y s . A W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t o n l y t r a n s m i t s d a t a u s i n g t h e a c t i v e k e y , b u t c a n r e c e i v e d a t a f r o m w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s u s i n g a n y o f t h e f o u r s h a r e d WEP ke ys. Tip: I f y o u h a v e a p r o f i l e t h a t i n c l u d e s m o r e t h a n o n e n e t w o r k , i t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t y o u u s e t h e s a m e s h a r e d W E P k e y s w i t h a l l t h e s e networks . Because t he shared WEP k eys are network-speci fic and user-indepen dent, they c a n b e s a v e d i n a f i l e t o g e t h e r w i t h p r o f i l e s . U s e r s c a n i m p o r t f r o m a f i l e o r a S I M c a r d p r o f i l e s t h a t i n c l u d e s h a r e d k e y s a n d t h a t h a v e b e e n c r e a t e d b y t h e i r s y s t e m administ rator. Shared keys can be used as the only form of WEP sec urity or used together with a personal key. P e r s o n a l W E P k e y s Each wireless station can have a n individual, personal WE P key. Personal keys are u s e d f o r p r o v i d i n g a d d i t i o n a l s e c u r i t y f o r w i r e l e s s c o n n e c t i o n s . T h e y a r e u s u a l l y crea ted by system admin ist ra tors, who dis tri bute them to u ser s. A WL AN acce ss point uses a different key for e ach wireless station. There a re two types of pers onal WEP keys, and the difference betwe en the keys is t h e t y p e o f i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t i s u s e d f o r i d e n t i f y i n g t h e u s e r : ⢠Station-specif ic â U s e s t h e M A C a d d r e s s o f t h e r a d i o c a r d t o i d e n t i f y t h e u s e r. ⢠User-specific â U ses an identi fier t ha t the users can creat e themsel ves. U n l i k e s h a r e d W E P k e y s , p e r s o n a l W E P k e y s a r e n o t n e t w o r k s p e c i f i c , a n d theref ore cann ot be saved toget her with profile s. They can , howe ver, be sav ed t o a file and u sed independently fro m profile s.
Nokia D211 f eatures 44 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Personal WEP keys can be used only wit h the infrastruct ure operat ing mode . Ad hoc networks use shared WEP keys only. Note: Not all WLAN access points support pers onal WEP keys. A sk your system administrator for m ore information. C r e a t i n g a n d e d i t i n g s h a r e d W E P k e y s Shared WEP keys are u sually created by a sy stem administrator. I n t h e i n f r a s t r u c t u r e o p e r a t i n g m o d e , m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e s a m e s h a r e d W E P k e y i s configured to the WLAN access point; if the access point and radio card are using incompatible keys, they cannot communicate. Contact your system administrator for details. 1 On the Pro files page, select the Modify tab. Select from the list the profile w i t h w h i c h y o u w a n t t o u s e a s h a r e d W E P k e y . C l i c k Ed it . 2 The Edit Profile dialog box opens. Select WLAN a n d Ge neral t a b . 3 Select the Use WEP securi ty c h e c k b o x a n d c l i c k WEP Keys . 4 Select from the four keys which one you want t o modify. C lick Ed it . 5 Select the appropr iate key leng th. Supported key lengths are 40, 128, a nd 152 bits. Re mem ber that the more bits there are in the key , the higher the level of s ecurity. T y p e i n t h e W E P k e y d a t a i n h e x a d e c i m a l f o r m a t . I f y o u w a n t t o e n t e r t h e W E P k e y i n t e x t f o r m , t y p e t h e t e x t i n t h e In text form box. You can copy and paste the t ext by using the CTRL C and CTRL V key com binations respectivel y. 6 Click OK t o s a v e t h e s h a r e d W E P k e y . To select w hich shared WEP key to use, select the key and click Activat e . T o e m p t y t h e c o n t e n t s o f t h e k e y , c l i c k Clear . Crea ting and edi ting per sona l WE P ke ys Personal WEP keys can be used only wit h the infrastruct ure operat ing mode . Ad hoc networks use shared WEP keys only. M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e s a m e p e r s o n a l W E P k e y i s c o n f i g u r e d t o t h e W L A N a c c e s s point; if the access point a nd radio card are using incompatible keys, they cannot communicate with each othe r . Contact your s ystem administrator for d etails. 1 Go to the Tools page and select the Per sonal K eys tab . Click Ne w t o c r e a t e a new key , or click Edit to modif y an existing one. 2 G i v e t h e p e r s o n a l k e y a n a m e . Y o u c a n a l s o i n c l u d e a f u r t h e r d e s c r i p t i o n o f t h e k e y, s u c h a s t h e n a m e o f t h e n e t w o r k w h e r e t h e k e y i s u s e d . 3 S e l e c t t h e t y p e o f k e y y o u w a n t t o c r e a t e : stati on-specific or user- spe cifi c . If you choose a station-specific key , the MAC address of the r adio card is used for identifyin g the user . I f you choose a user -specific key , you can cho ose the iden tifi er your sel f.
Nokia D211 f eatures 45 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. 4 Select the appropr iate key leng th. Supported key lengths are 40, 128, a nd 152 b i t s . R e m e m b e r t h a t t h e m o r e b i t s t h e r e a r e i n t h e k e y, t h e h i g h e r t h e l e v e l o f security . Click Generate . The system gen erates your perso nal k ey. I f y o u w a n t t o e n t e r t h e W E P k e y i n t e x t f o r m , t y p e t h e t e x t i n t h e In text form b o x . Y o u c a n c o p y a n d p a s t e t h e t e x t b y u s i n g t h e C T R L C a n d C T R L V k e y combinations respectively. 5 Click OK t o s a v e t h e W E P k e y . Importi ng and exporti ng perso nal WEP keys Instead of creat ing a personal WEP key yourself, you can import from a folder a key c r e a t e d , f o r e x a m p l e , b y y o u r s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r . Y o u c a n e x p o r t a n d s a v e personal keys in folder s. T he system administrator can import personal WEP ke ys from a SIM card and export them to a SIM card. 1 On the Tools page, select the Pe rsonal K eys t a b . S e l e c t t h e k e y y o u w a n t t o save t o a file and click Export . T o open a key from a file, click Import . 2 I f y o u a r e e x p o r t i n g a p e r s o n a l W E P k e y, s e l e c t t h e d e s t i n a t i o n t o w h i c h y o u w a n t t o s a v e t h e k e y, a n d c l i c k Save. I f y o u a r e i m p o r t i n g a k e y, s e l e c t t h e source from w hich you want to import the key and click Open . Sele ctin g a p erso nal WE P ke y 1 On the Pro files page, select the Modify tab. Select from the list the profile w i t h w h i c h y o u w a n t t o u s e a p e r s o n a l W E P k e y . C l i c k Edit . 2 The Edit Profile dialog box opens. Select WLAN a n d Ge neral t a b . 3 Select the Use WEP securi ty c h e c k b o x a n d c l i c k WEP Keys . 4 Select the Use a personal WEP key c h e c k b o x a n d s e l e c t a k e y f r o m t h e l i s t . 5 Click OK .
Nokia Short Messaging 46 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Nokia Short Messaging The Nokia Sh ort Messaging application enables you to manage text and picture messages in a similar way that you manage e-m ail: you can send and receive m e s s a g e s , r e p l y t o a m e s s a g e , a n d f o r w a r d a m e s s a g e . The sending and receiving o f mess ages req uires that the Short Message Service (SMS) is availa ble in the GS M network you are using and it i s activated for your SIM card. Contact your service provider or network oper ator for details . Note: You cann ot se nd or receive messages when con nected to a WLAN. Tip: Yo u ca n ac ces s th e Nok ia Short M essa gin g app lic ation by rig ht-c lick ing t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i c o n o n t h e t a s k b a r a n d b y s e l e c t i n g SMS ap plication from the shortcut menu. If the ta skbar icon is not visible, see page 33 for more information. The Nokia Sho rt Messagin g application consists of the fol lowing page s: ⢠The Inbo x p a g e c o n t a i n s t h e r e c e i v e d m e s s a g e s . R e c e i v e d t e x t m e s s a g e . I f t h e m e s s a g e i c o n i s g r e e n , y o u h a v e n o t r e a d the messa ge. Received pi cture message. M e s s a g e t h a t y o u h a v e f o r w a r d e d t o s o m e o n e . M e s s a g e t o w h i c h y o u h a v e r e p l i e d . Yo u h a v e b o t h r e p l i e d t o t h e m e s s a g e a n d f o r w a r d e d i t t o s o m e o n e . Received business card. ⢠The Outbox p a g e c o n t a i n s m e s s a g e s t h a t a r e b e i n g s e n t o r w a i t i n g t o b e s e n t . If you write and send a new message when the radio card is not inserted in the w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n , y o u a r e c o n n e c t e d t o W L A N , o r t h e G S M o r G P R S c o n n e c t i o n i s l o s t , t h e u n s e n t m e s s a g e i s s t o r e d i n O u t b o x . O u t b o x m a y c o n t a i n s e v e r a l unsent messa ges, which are the n s ent when the rad io ca rd is insert ed, or a proper network connection is established. The messages can have the following statuses: Sending â The message is c urrently being sent. Waiting â T h e m e s s a g e i s w a i t i n g f o r s e n d i n g t o b e c o m e p o s s i b l e . ⢠The Delivery reports page cont ains inf ormation on the status of the message s y o u h a v e s e n t . T h i s i s a n e t w o r k s e r v i c e t o w h i c h y o u m u s t s u b s c r i b e b e f o r e being able to use it.
Nokia Short Messaging 47 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. P oss ibl e status es for sent messag es are: Deli vered â T h e m e s s a g e h a s b e e n d e l i v e r e d t o t h e r e c i p i e n t . Pending â T h e m e s s a g e h a s n o t b e e n d e l i v e r e d t o t h e r e c i p i e n t y e t . I f t h e recipient of a message cannot be reached w ithin the set message validity period, the message is removed from the message centre. Failed â The message could not be deliv ered to the recipien t. The recipient was not reached wit hin t he set mess age vali dity pe riod and the message was removed from the message centre. ⢠The Sent messages page contains a copy of each sent message. ⢠The Conta cts page ena bles you t o m anage contact information an d bu siness cards stored on the SIM card. Y ou can create, edit, and dele te contact s, and send business cards as text messages. T ext messages B e f o r e y o u c a n s e n d a n y t e x t m e s s a g e s , y o u n e e d t o s a v e y o u r m e s s a g e c e n t r e number. See âÂÂConfiguring message settingsâ on page 4 8 for more information. Make sure you have either a GSM or GPRS connection type selected. You cann ot send or re ceive messages w hen conne cted to WLAN. Send ing text messa ges 1 Click on the toolb ar , or cli ck New o n t h e File menu. The Message Editor dialog box open s. 2 In the Message fi eld, ty pe the message. The character counter above the f ield s h o w s h o w m a n y c h a r a c t e r s y o u h a v e l e f t a n d i n h o w m a n y m e s s a g e s t h e t e x t will be sent. Note: T h e s t a n d a r d l e n g t h o f a t e x t m e s s a g e i s 1 6 0 c h a r a c t e r s . M e s s a g e s l o n g e r t h a n t h i s c a n b e s e n t a s s e v e r a l n o r m a l t e x t m e s s a g e s o r a s o n e c o n c a t e n a t e d t e x t m e s s a g e w h i c h i s r e c e i v e d a s o n e l o n g m e s s a g e i f t h e r e c i p i e n t ' s d e v i c e s u p p o r t s t h i s f u n c t i o n . Y o u c a n s e l e c t t h e Send l ong mess age s o ption on the Se ttings p a g e o f t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 . S e e âÂÂConfiguri ng message settings â on page 48 for more informa tion. Y o u c a n a t t a c h a p i c t u r e t o t h e t e x t m e s s a g e . S e e â S e n d i n g p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s â on page 49 for more in formation. 3 Click the A d d R e c i p i e n t s button. Select the recipient from the list of contacts on t he le ft and click the arrow button p ointing to t he right. If you do n ot have a cont act card cr eated for the recipien t, type the phone num ber in the Number box and click the a rrow button. Note that y ou c an send the message t o s e v e r a l r e c i p i e n t s . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e r e c i p i e n t s , c l i c k OK . 4 T o s e n d t h e m e s s a g e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r.
Nokia Short Messaging 48 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Replyin g to text messa ges 1 On the Inbox page, select the m essage to whic h you want to rep ly. 2 Click o n the toolbar , or click Reply o n t h e File m e n u . T h e Messag e Editor dialog box open s. 3 In the Message field, type your reply. 4 T o s e n d t h e m e s s a g e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r. Forw ardi ng text m ess ages 1 On the Inbox p a g e , s e l e c t t h e m e s s a g e y o u w a n t t o f o r w a r d . T o f o r w a r d a message you have sent to so meone, go to the Sent messag es page and select the message. 2 Click on the toolbar , or click Forward o n t h e File m e n u . T h e Message Edit or dialog box ope ns. 3 Click the A d d R e c i p i e n t s button. Select the recipient from the list of contacts on t he le ft and click the arrow button p ointing to t he right. If you do n ot have a cont act card cr eated for the recipien t, type the phone num ber in the Number box and click the a rrow button. Note that y ou c an send the message t o s e v e r a l r e c i p i e n t s . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e r e c i p i e n t s , c l i c k OK . 4 T o s e n d t h e m e s s a g e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r. Deletin g text message s and deliver y report s To del ete a text message 1 On the In box pa ge, sele ct the m essa ge you wa nt to de lete. To dele te an uns ent message, go to the Outbox p a g e , a n d t o d e l e t e a s e n t m e s s a g e , g o t o t h e Sent mes sage s p a g e . 2 Click o n the toolbar , or click De lete o n t h e File m enu. T o delet e a ll messages, click Delet e All o n t h e File m e n u . To d elete delivery reports: 1 On the De livery reports page, select the delive ry repor t you want to delete . 2 Click on the t oolbar , or click De lete o n t h e File menu. By clicking t he Clea r List button you can delete the whole list of reports. Conf igur ing me ssa ge setting s 1 On the Tools menu, click Nokia D211 . The Manager window of the Nokia D2 1 1 opens. 2 Go to the Settin gs p a g e a n d s e l e c t t h e GSM tab . Click Advanced Sett ings . 3 The Advance d GSM S ett ing s dialog box opens. Sel ect the Mess ages t a b .
Nokia Short Messaging 49 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. 4 Make the nec essary changes. See âÂÂMess agesâ o n page 3 6 for more information. 5 When you have con figur ed the nec essar y settin gs, clic k OK . Picture messag es You can send and receive text messages that contain pictures. These mess ages are called picture messages. Note t hat: ⢠This function can be used only if it is support ed by your network operator or service provider. Only devi ces t hat offer pi cture me ssage fea tures can receiv e and di splay pi cture messages. ⢠E a c h p i c t u r e m e s s a g e i s m a d e u p o f t h r e e t e x t m e s s a g e s . T h e r e f o r e , s e n d i n g one picture message may cost more than sendin g on e text message . ⢠Before you can sen d any picture messages, you need to save your message centre number . See âÂÂConfiguring message se ttingsâ on page 48 for more information. ⢠Make sure you have either a GSM or GPRS connec tion type se lected. Y ou cannot send or receiv e m essages when connected to WLAN. Send ing pictur e messages 1 Click on the toolb ar , or cli ck New o n t h e File menu. The Message Editor dialog box open s. 2 T o i n s e r t a p i c t u r e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r. T h e Pictur e Library dialog box opens. 3 S e l e c t t h e p i c t u r e y o u w a n t t o a t t a c h t o t h e m e s s a g e a n d c l i c k OK . I f t h e r e a r e n o p i c t u r e s a v a i l a b l e i n t h e l i s t , c l i c k t o d r a w a n e w p i c t u r e o r import a picture from a file by clicking . See âÂÂDrawing and editing picturesâ on p age 50 and âÂÂOpenin g pictur es fro m a fileâ on page 5 0 for more information. 4 In the Message fi eld, ty pe the message. The character counter above the f ield s h o w s h o w m a n y c h a r a c t e r s y o u h a v e l e f t a n d i n h o w m a n y m e s s a g e s t h e t e x t will be sent. 5 Click the A d d R e c i p i e n t s button. Select the recipient from the list of contacts on t he le ft and click the arrow button p ointing to t he right. If you do n ot have a cont act card cr eated for the recipien t, type the phone num ber in the Number box and click the a rrow button. Note that y ou c an send the message t o s e v e r a l r e c i p i e n t s . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e r e c i p i e n t s , c l i c k OK . 6 T o s e n d t h e m e s s a g e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r.
Nokia Short Messaging 50 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Draw ing and e dit ing pictur es 1 On the Tools menu, clic k Pict ure Library . 2 T o d r a w a n e w p i c t u r e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r. T o e d i t a p i c t u r e , s e l e c t t h e picture and click on t he toolbar . The Picture Edito r dialog box opens . 3 M o v e t h e m o u s e c u r s o r t o t h e d e s i r e d p o s i t i o n . T h e c u r s o r a p p e a r s a s a p e n o n the drawing area. Press down the left mouse button. Move the mouse to draw . The left m ouse button draws black colo ur , and the right mouse button draws w h i t e c o l o u r. T o s t o p d r a w i n g , r e l e a s e t h e m o u s e b u t t o n . C l i c k Sav e t o s a v e the picture. 4 Click Close to close the Pictur e Library dialo g box. S a v i n g p i c t u r e s t o a f i l e 1 On the Tools menu, clic k Pict ure Library . 2 S e l e c t t h e p i c t u r e y o u w a n t t o s a v e t o a f i l e . C l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r. 3 In the Export Picture dialog box , type a nam e for the file. By de fault, pictures a r e s a v e d a s p i c t u r e m e s s a g e f i l e s i n g m s f o r m a t . C l i c k Save . 4 Click Close to close the Pictur e Library dialo g box. If you have received a picture message, you can add the picture to the Pi cture Library by cl icki ng Save P ictu re o n t h e File m e n u . Open ing pictur es from a fil e 1 On the Tools menu, clic k Pict ure Library . 2 Click on the toolbar . 3 In the Import Picture d ialog box, select or ty pe the name of the file you want t o i m p o r t t o t h e P i c t u r e L i b r a r y . C l i c k Open . 4 Click Close to close the Pictur e Library dialo g box. Dele ting p ictu res 1 On the Tools menu, clic k Pict ure Library . 2 Select the picture you want to re move and click on the toolbar . 3 Click Close to close the Pictur e Library dialo g box. Contacts C o n t a c t s a r e n a m e s a n d p h o n e n u m b e r s t h a t h a v e b e e n s a v e d i n t h e S I M c a r d â s memory .
Nokia Short Messaging 51 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Crea ting a nd editing co nta cts 1 On the Co ntacts p a g e , c l i c k New t o c r e a t e a n e w c o n t a c t . T o e d i t a c o n t a c t , click Edit . The C o n t a c t Inf orm atio n dialog opens. 2 Ty pe th e name and phone numbe r for the contact. Click OK . I f y o u r e c e i v e a m e s s a g e f r o m a p h o n e n u m b e r t h a t i s n o t s t o r e d o n y o u r S I M c a r d , you can save the number to the list of contacts by clicking Add To Contacts o n t h e File m e n u . Dele ting c onta cts 1 On the Co ntacts page, select the contac t you want to delete. 2 Click o n the toolbar , or click De lete . Send ing busine ss cards W h e n y o u s e n d o r r e c e i v e a p e r s o n â s c o n t a c t i n f o r m a t i o n , t h e t e r m business card i s u s e d . A b u s i n e s s c a r d i s a c o n t a c t c a r d i n a f o r m a t s u i t a b l e f o r t r a n s m i s s i o n , such as vCard format. 1 On the Contacts p a g e , s e l e c t t h e c o n t a c t y o u w a n t t o s e n d a s a b u s i n e s s c a r d . Click Send . 2 The Send Busines s Card dialog box opens. T ype the p hone number of the recipient, or click Selec t t o s e l e c t t h e r e c i p i e n t f r o m t h e l i s t o f c o n t a c t s . 3 Click Send to send the business card. Make sure you have either a GSM or GPRS connection type selected. You cann ot send business cards when con nected to WLAN. Chat T h e c h a t f u n c t i o n a l l o w s y o u t o h a v e a c o n v e r s a t i o n w i t h a n o t h e r p e r s o n u s i n g t e x t m e s s a g e s . T h e o t h e r p a r t y m u s t h a v e e i t h e r t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 o r a m o b i l e p h o n e w i t h t h e S M S c a p a b i l i t y . Make sure you have either a GSM or GPRS connection type selected. You cann ot send or re ceive messages w hen conne cted to WLAN. Conf igur ing ch at setting s 1 On the Tools menu, clic k Options . 2 Y ou can configure the following chat settings: Y ou ca n spe cif y the numbe r o f h ours fo r w hich the cha t me ssag es are show n in the Chat window during the conversation . Chat n ame â N i c k n a m e t h a t i s d i s p l a y e d w i t h y o u r c h a t m e s s a g e s .
Nokia Short Messaging 52 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Always show chat window on top â S e l e c t t h i s i f y o u w a n t t h e c h a t w i n d o w t o remain visible even when you have other appli cations o pen. 3 Click OK t o a p p l y t h e s e t t i n g s . Startin g a chat sessio n 1 On the Conta cts p a g e , s e l e c t t h e c o n t a c t y o u w a n t t o s t a r t a c h a t s e s s i o n w i t h . If you do not have a contact card created for the other party , you have to create one first. See âÂÂCreating and editing contactsâ on page 5 1 for more information. 2 Click on t he toolbar , or click Chat o n t h e Tools m e n u . 3 The C h a t dialog box opens. Write the mess age in the Message field and click . 4 W h e n y o u r e c e i v e a r e p l y f r o m t h e o t h e r p a r t y, t h e r e p l y m e s s a g e i s s h o w n automatic ally in the Chat w i n d o w. I t i s n o t s t o r e d i n Inbo x . You can save the chat conversation to a text file. Click on the toolbar to save the file. You can also at tach pictures to your ch at mess ages. See âÂÂPicture messagesâ on page 49 for m ore information on h ow to handle pictures in messages.
Troubleshooting 53 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. T roubleshooting Ins talla tion The installation program is interrupted. Make sure you have en ough power on your computer. Make sure you have enough fr ee disk space on your computer. Make sur e y ou have enough res ourc es availab le in the syste m. Check that you have close d all Windows programs before starting the installation , and that you have not inserted the radio card int o y our computer until p rompted to do so by the installation program. The CD -ROM drive cannot be opened during in stallation. Some CD-ROM drives c annot be opened when installing software from them. If y o u t h i n k t h a t y o u m i g h t n e e d t h e o p e r a t i n g s y s t e m f i l e s d u r i n g t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n , it is advisable that you firs t copy the Nokia D211 installation files to t he h ard drive of your comp atible PC and install the program fr om there . T h e r a d i o c a r d c a n n o t b e i n s e r t e d i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t . Check that the radio card is turn ed the right side up. Check the PC card slot for a ny problems. After inserting the radio card, it takes a while before t he computer r esponds. There might be a pause while the drive r initialises the radio card. This is normal. Please wait until t he next message box appears and tells you what to do. This should not take more than a few minut es. Installation to a network drive fails. You cannot install the Nokia D 211 s oftware onto a netw ork drive. T he software must always be inst alled on a local har d drive. I d o n o t h a v e a C D - R O M d r i v e o n m y c o m p u t e r . Using another computer, copy t he installation program on floppy disks. On the CD-ROM there is a fo lder at English\Se tup. Copy the contents of this fol der on f l o p p y d i s k s . I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t y o u t h e n c o p y t h e c o n t e n t s o f t h e d i s k s t o t h e hard drive of your compatible PC before inst alling. If install ed dire ctly fr om the floppy disks, the system will ask you t o change the disk seve ral times.
Troubleshooting 54 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Networ k The r adio card seems to be working, but the n etwork connection does not work. Run the fau lt di agnos is te sts o n t he Tools pa ge. If a ll test s are pas sed su cce ssf ully , m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e n e t w o r k s e t t i n g s a r e c o r r e c t . A s k y o u r s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r for advice. In Windo ws 98 /Me , N et work N eig hbor ho od does not s how my co mpu ter name at a ll. Other computer s c annot see my computer name in Network Neighborhoo d either. Open the Network dialog box (click Start , Sett ings , Control Panel , Network ) and click the Fi le and Print Shari ng button. Make s ure that the I wa nt to be able to give o thers access to my f iles c h e c k b o x i s s e l e c t e d . O t h e r u s e r s s h o u l d n o w b e able to see your computer in Network Neighborhood. If y ou share folders on your computer , oth er users can see them too. I cannot access the I nterne t. W h e n u s i n g a W L A N c o n n e c t i o n t y p e , c h e c k t h a t y o u u s e a r o u t i n g p r o t o c o l s u c h as TCP/IP. M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e p r o x y s e t t i n g s i n t h e W e b b r o w s e r a r e c o r r e c t . A l s o m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e r e i s a c o n n e c t i o n f r o m y o u r n e t w o r k t o t h e I n t e r n e t . Resources The r adio card does not work and this is prob ably caused by another installed d evice. C h e c k t h a t t h e r a d i o c a r d i s n o t t r y i n g t o u s e a n I / O , I R Q , o r m e m o r y a d d r e s s u s e d b y a n o t h e r d e v i c e i n y o u r c o m p u t e r . T o c h e c k t h e s t a t u s o f r e s o u r c e s i n W i n d o w s 98/Me, click Start - Sett ings - Contr ol Panel - Syst em - Device M anag er - Network Adapters . If the re is a conflict , a yellow symbol is shown in fron t of the name of t he device. Hardware I a m n o t s u r e i f t h e r a d i o c a r d i s w o r k i n g . Check in the Monitor window that the radio card is working. You can also c heck the Status pa ge for th e status of the c onnection . There are no r esource conflicts, but the radio card still does not work. Check that the operat ing e nvironment does not cause damage or interferen ce to the radio card. Detailed information on the operating environment can be foun d in the chapte r âÂÂAbout data trans missio nâ on page 8.
Troubleshooting 55 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Check that the radio card is proper ly inserted. Run fault diagnosi s tests on t he Tool s p a g e . Y o u c a n t r y t o d e t e r m i n e w h e t h e r t h e p r o b l e m l i e s w i t h t h e c o m p u t e r o r t h e r a d i o card by using the c ard in another available PC card slot, by i nstalling t he card in another compute r, or by using another card in the f irst computer. The r adio card does not work in an other PC card slot, but works i n anoth er computer. Try to insert another PC card in the slot to determine if there is a compatibility p r o b l e m b e t w e e n t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 a n d t h e P C c a r d s l o t , o r i f t h e r e i s a g e n e r a l f a u l t with the slot. The SIM card is not detected by the radio card. M a k e s u r e t h a t y o u a r e u s i n g a c o r r e c t t y p e o f S I M c a r d . T h e r a d i o c a r d d o e s n o t support 5 V olt SIM cards. M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e S I M c a r d i s i n s e r t e d c o r r e c t l y : t h e c o n n e c t o r s o n t h e S I M c a r d and t he radi o card must meet. Note: You can find the latest troubleshooting information in the readme.txt f i l e o n t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 C D - R O M . Tip: On t he Tools page you can run fault diagno sis test s and save the te st results t o a text file. The report c an be useful if you n eed, for exa mple, to contact technical support in problem situations.
Care and maintenance 56 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. C a r e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e Your radio card is a produc t of superior design and crafts manship and should be treated w ith care. The suggestions below will help you to fu lfil any warranty o b l i g a t i o n s a n d t o e n j o y t h i s p r o d u c t f o r m a n y y e a r s . ⢠Keep t he r adio card and all its parts and acce ssories out of small children's reach. ⢠Keep the radio card dry. Precipitat ion, humidity , and all types of liqui ds or moisture can contain minerals th at will corrode electronic circuits. ⢠Do not use or store the radio card in dusty , dirt y ar eas. ⢠D o n o t s t o r e t h e r a d i o c a r d i n h o t a r e a s . H i g h t e m p e r a t u r e s c a n s h o r t e n t h e l i f e of e lectronic devices, and warp or melt cer tain plastics. ⢠D o n o t s t o r e t h e r a d i o c a r d i n c o l d a r e a s . W h e n i t w a r m s u p ( t o i t s n o r m a l temperatur e), moisture can form inside, which may damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠D o n o t a t t e m p t t o o p e n t h e r a d i o c a r d . N o n - e x p e r t h a n d l i n g m a y d a m a g e i t . ⢠D o n o t d r o p , k n o c k , o r s h a k e t h e r a d i o c a r d . R o u g h h a n d l i n g c a n b r e a k i n t e r n a l circuit boards. ⢠D o n o t u s e h a r s h c h e m i c a l s , c l e a n i n g s o l v e n t s , o r s t r o n g d e t e r g e n t s t o c l e a n the radio card. ⢠D o n o t p a i n t t h e r a d i o c a r d . Pa i n t c a n p r e v e n t p r o p e r o p e r a t i o n . ⢠Use only the supplied antenna. Un authorised antennas, modifications , or attachments could damage the radio c ard and may viol ate re gulations gover ning radio devi ces. A l l o f t h e a b o v e s u g g e s t i o n s a p p l y e q u a l l y t o y o u r r a d i o c a r d o r a n y a c c e s s o r y . I f a n y o f t h e m i s n o t w o r k i n g p r o p e r l y , t a k e i t t o y o u r n e a r e s t q u a l i f i e d s e r v i c e facility. The pe rsonnel there will assist you and, if necessary, arrange for se rvice.
Impo rtant safet y info rmati on 57 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Important safety information Traffic safety D o n o t u s e t h e r a d i o c a r d w h i l e d r i v i n g a v e h i c l e . D o n o t p l a c e t h e r a d i o c a r d o n the passenger s eat or where it can break loose in a collision or s udden s top. Remember: road s afety al ways comes first! Oper atin g environ ment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always powe r o f f y o u r r a d i o c a r d w h e n e v e r i t i s f o r b i d d e n t o u s e i t , o r w h e n i t m a y c a u s e i n t e r f e r e n c e o r d a n g e r . N o t e t h a t t h e r a d i o c a r d m a y c a u s e s i m i l a r i n t e r f e r e n c e a s any cellular terminal (e.g. mobile phone) and must not be used in areas where the use of a ny such device is prohibit ed. Use the radio card in its normal operating positions. Elec tron ic devices Most modern electronic equipment is s hielded from r adio fr equency (RF) si gnals. However, certain electroni c equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your r adio card. Pacema kers Pacemaker manufacturers recomm end that a minimum separation of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintained betw een a radio card and a p acemaker to avoid potential interfe rence with the pac emaker. These recommen dations are consisten t wit h the independe nt research by and recomme ndations of Wireless Technology Researc h. Persons with pacemakers: ⢠S h o u l d a l w a y s k e e p t h e r a d i o c a r d m o r e t h a n 2 0 c m ( 6 i n c h e s ) f r o m t h e i r pacemaker when the radio card is powe red on . ⢠Should not carry the radio card in a breast pocke t. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect t hat interference is taking place, power off your radio card immediately. Hearing aids Some digital radio cards may interfere with some hearing aids. In t he event of such interfere nce, you may want to consult your service provider. Other medical device s Operatio n of any radio transmitting equipment , inclu ding radio cards, may interfere with the functionality of in adequately protected medical de vices. Consult a physician or th e manuf acture r of the medical de vice to dete rmine if
Impo rtant safet y info rmati on 58 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. they are ad equat ely s hiel ded fro m e xternal RF ener gy or if you hav e any qu estio ns. Power off your radio card in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so . Hospit als or health care f acilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to e xternal RF energy. Vehi cles RF s ignals m ay aff ect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles (e .g. electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti- s k i d ( a n t i - l o c k ) b r a k i n g s y s t e m s , e l e c t r o n i c s p e e d c o n t r o l s y s t e m s , a i r - b a g syst ems) . Chec k with th e manuf actu rer or its repres enta tiv e regar din g your vehicle. You should also consult the man ufacturer of any equipment that has been added to you r vehicl e. Posted facilities Power off your radio card in any facility where posted notices s o requi re. Potenti ally explosi ve atmospher es P o w e r o f f y o u r r a d i o c a r d w h e n l o c a t e d i n a n y a r e a w i t h a p o t e n t i a l l y e x p l o s i v e atmosphere a nd obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such a reas could c ause an e xplosion or fire resulti ng in bodily injury or e ven death . Users are advi sed t o power o ff th e rad io card w hen at a refuelling point (se rvice stati on). Users ar e remin ded of the need t o obse rve rest rict ions on the us e of r adio equipment in fuel de pots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasti ng op erations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosph ere are often but not always clearly marked. These include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities; v e h i c l e s u s i n g l i q u i f i e d p e t r o l e u m g a s ( s u c h a s p r o p a n e o r b u t a n e ) ; a r e a s w h e r e t h e a i r c o n t a i n s c h e m i c a l s o r p a r t i c l e s , s u c h a s g r a i n , d u s t , o r m e t a l p o w d e r s ; a n d a n y o t h e r a r e a w h e r e y o u w o u l d n o r m a l l y b e a d v i s e d t o t u r n o f f y o u r v e h i c l e engine . Vehicle s D o n o t s t o r e o r c a r r y f l a m m a b l e l i q u i d s , g a s e s , o r e x p l o s i v e m a t e r i a l s i n t h e s a m e c o m p a r t m e n t a s t h e r a d i o c a r d , i t s p a r t s o r a c c e s s o r i e s . For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects in the area over the air bag or in t he air bag deployment a r e a . I f t h e r a d i o c a r d i s i m p r o p e r l y p l a c e d a n d t h e a i r b a g i n f l a t e s , s e r i o u s i n j u r y could result. U s i n g y o u r r a d i o c a r d w h i l e i n t h e a i r i s p r o h i b i t e d . R e m o v e y o u r r a d i o c a r d f r o m the PC card slot befor e bo arding an aircraft. The use of radio car ds in an airc raft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless t elephon e network and may be illegal. Failure to obse rve the se instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender, or legal action or both .
Impo rtant safet y info rmati on 59 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Antenna T h i s p r o d u c t m o d e l h a s b e e n t e s t e d a n d m e e t s r a d i o f r e q u e n c y e x p o s u r e g u i d e l i n e s w h e n u s e d i n a p o s i t i o n t h a t k e e p s t h e a n t e n n a a t l e a s t 2 . 0 c m f r o m your body wh en the produ ct is switched on. As with any other radi o t ransmi tting devi ce, do not touch the an tenna unneces sarily when the product is on. Contact with the a ntenna affects connection quality and may cause the radio card to oper ate at a higher power level than otherwise needed.
Glossary 60 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Glossary Access contro ller Physical device that manages permission and restrictions for logging onto a computer or network. Ad hoc O n e o f t h e t w o W L A N o p e r a t i n g m o d e s t h a t c a n b e s e l e c t e d w h e n u s i n g t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 . W i t h t h i s c o n f i g u r a t i o n o p t i o n , u s e r s c a n s e t u p a w i r e l e s s l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k w h e r e w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s c a n s e n d a n d r e c e i v e d a t a d i r e c t l y w i t h e a c h other without WLAN acce ss points. This type of network is somet imes c alled a peer-to-peer netwo rk. Barring password The barring pas sword is a 4-digit code needed to change call barrings . The p a s s w o r d i s n o t l o c a t e d i n y o u r r a d i o c a r d o r S I M c a r d , b u t i n t h e n e t w o r k . Y o u obtain the pass word from yo ur service pro vider or network operator when you subscribe to the call barring s ervice. Dual-band functionality Dual-band functionality provides s eamless roaming bet ween ne tworks during a call within the same network o pera tor. In practice , this means that you are less l i k e l y t o g e t â N e t w o r k b u s y â m e s s a g e s . W h e n y o u a r e a b r o a d , d u a l - b a n d function ality gives mo re roaming possibil ities, depending on y our network operator' s roam ing agr eement. GSM GSM (Global System for Mobile Communicatio ns) is a digital telecommunications s y s t e m u s e d w i d e l y i n E u r o p e , A s i a a n d t h e P a c i f i c . GPRS General Packet Radio Service . GPR S is a techn ology t hat enables sending a nd r e c e i v i n g d a t a o v e r a m o b i l e n e t w o r k . G P R S a s s u c h i s a d a t a b e a r e r t h a t e n a b l e s wire less ac cess to d ata n etwor ks like the In ternet. The ap plicat ions tha t use GPRS are SMS mess aging and the GPRS dial-up (fo r example, Int erne t and e-mail). GPRS access point Inter face betw een a GPRS netw ork and e xter nal pack et data netw orks , such as the Inter net. Home network Y o u r h o m e n e t w o r k i s t h e n e t w o r k r u n b y t h e o p e r a t o r t h a t i s s u e d y o u r S I M c a r d .
Glossary 61 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data. HSCSD technology enables a data transmi ssion speed of up to 43.2 kilo bits pe r secon d. HSCSD technology is based on t he use of multiple timeslots at the same time. The transmission speed in a single timeslot is 9 . 6 o r 1 4 . 4 k i l o b i t s p e r s e c o n d . Infrastructure O n e o f t h e t w o W L A N o p e r a t i n g m o d e s t h a t c a n b e s e l e c t e d w h e n u s i n g t h e N o k i a D211. With this c onfiguration option users can set up a wirele ss local area n e t w o r k w h e r e w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h w i r e d a n d w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s thro ugh a WLAN acces s point . Network operator A network operator maintains a cellular telecommunications network in a specific a r e a , o f t e n i n a p a r t i c u l a r c o u n t r y . S e v e r a l n e t w o r k o p e r a t o r s m a y h a v e overlapping networks. N e t w o r k o p e r a t o r s o f f e r a v a r i e t y o f n e t w o r k s e r v i c e s , i n c l u d i n g G S M d a t a s e r v i c e s s u c h a s t h e S h o r t M e s s a g e S e r v i c e ( S M S ) , b o t h t o i n d i v i d u a l s u b s c r i b e r s a n d s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r s . N o t a l l n e t w o r k o p e r a t o r s p r o v i d e e x a c t l y t h e s a m e s e r v i c e s . Network ser vices Special services provided by n etwork ope rators and serv ice providers. T hese services must be subscribed to, and typicall y inc lude the Short Message Ser vice (SMS), data serv ice a nd fax se rvice. Picture message Text message that contains pictures . Eac h picture mess age is made up of severa l t e x t m e s s a g e s . T h i s f u n c t i o n c a n b e u s e d o n l y i f i t i s s u p p o r t e d b y y o u r n e t w o r k operator or servic e provide r. Only devices that offer the pi cture message fea ture can r eceive and display pictures. PIN code P e r s o n a l I d e n t i f i c a t i o n N u m b e r c o d e . P I N c o d e ( 4 t o 8 d i g i t s ) i s a n a c c e s s c o d e f o r protect ing a SIM card a gainst unauthorised use. Profile A profile is a group of network-spe cific and Windows networkin g setti ngs. Profiles enabl e easy transfer from one network to anothe r withou t havin g to rem ember all the diffe rent settin gs. PUK code PIN Unblocking Key code . PUK is a 8-digit code s upplied with the SIM card. The code is ne eded w hen you want t o change a blocked PIN code. You cannot
Glossary 62 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. c h a n g e t h e P U K c o d e . I f y o u l o s e t h e c o d e , c o n t a c t y o u r s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r o r network operator. Securi ty code The security code is supplied with the radio card . It protects your radio card against unau thorised use. Kee p the code secret and in a s afe place, separ ate from t h e r a d i o c a r d . I f y o u k e y i n a n i n c o r r e c t s e c u r i t y c o d e f i v e t i m e s i n s u c c e s s i o n , t h e radio card will not accept the correct code for the next five minute s. Ser vice prov id er A company that o ffers telecommunic ations services, such as n etwork services. A service provider may be a network operator or a separate company. Short message See âÂÂText messag eâ . SIM card Subscri ber Ident ity Mo dule card. A small plas tic card w ith an embedd ed integrated circuit. The SIM card contains all the information the cellular n etwork needs to identify t he network user. The SIM card als o contain s secu rity-related information . SMS Short Message Service. SMS is a network service provide d by network operators or service providers. It enables sending and rece iving sh ort t ext me ssages over the digital cellular network. Th e stan dard length of a text message is 160 characters . Text message Short message that is sent over the digital cellular network. The standard length of a text message is 160 ch aracters. WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy. A security f eature using the RC4 algorithm that p e r f o r m s w i r e l e s s d a t a e n c r y p t i o n . T h e W E P a l g o r i t h m u s e s u p t o 1 5 2 - b i t k e y s . Wireless station Any computing device with a PC card slot, into whi ch the radio card can be inserted in order t o send and receive data. WLAN W i r e l e s s L o c a l A r e a N e t w o r k . A l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k i n w h i c h r a d i o l i n k s a r e u s e d t o connect devices instead of phys ical cables. WLAN ac cess po int Physical device that conne cts wi red and wireles s n etworks together.
Inde x 63 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Index A access code s ....... ......... ......... ............. ......... .... 37 changin g ........ ......... ......... .......... ......... .... 38 access points GPRS ..... ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 32 WLAN.... .......... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 11 ad hoc networks creat ing ................ ......... .......... ......... ....... 22 joining ......... ............ ......... .......... ......... .... 22 ad hoc o peratin g mod e ................ ......... ....... 12 Admin istrator page ....... ......... .......... ...... 40âÂÂ42 advan ced GSM s ettings ............ ......... ... 34âÂÂ37 advan ced WLAN settings ......... ......... ......... . 28 alert to nes .... ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 37 ante nnas ....... .......... ............ .......... ......... ... 13, 59 autom atic GSM netwo rk sele ction ....... .... 34 autom atic network connec tion .... ......... .... 33 B barrin g calls ........... ......... ......... .......... ............ . 35 barrin g passw ord ........... ............. ......... ......... . 35 busines s cards .......... ............ .......... ......... ....... 51 C call s barring ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 35 divertin g ........ ......... ......... ............. ......... . 34 care and maintena nce .... ............. ......... ....... 56 cell info display ........... ......... .......... ......... ....... 34 changin g acce ss codes .............. ......... ......... . 38 chann els .... .......... ............ ......... .......... ......... .... 29 chat .... ............ .......... ......... ......... .......... ......... .... 51 settin gs ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 51 start ing........... ......... ......... .......... ............ . 52 conn ecting to network.......... .......... ...... 19âÂÂ21 conn ection status indicators ............ ... 21âÂÂ22 conn ection types ........... ......... ............. ......... . 20 selecti ng ........... ......... .......... ......... .......... 26 cont acts ........ .......... ......... ......... .......... ......... .... 50 creat ing ................ ......... .......... ......... ....... 51 deletin g ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 51 editing ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 51 counters.... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... .. 25, 39 creating ad hoc n etworks . .......... ......... ............ ... 22 contac ts .... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 51 installa tion disks ....... ............ ......... ...... 41 networ k conne ctions ......... ......... .. 19âÂÂ21 persona l WE P ke ys .... ............ ......... ...... 44 pictu res ........ ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 50 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... .. 26âÂÂ28 reports , See reports share d WE P ke ys ........... ............ ......... ... 44 D data calls ......... ......... ......... .......... ... 8, 10, 19, 21 counte rs ............. .......... ......... ......... ......... 25 trans mission ........ .......... ......... ......... ......... 8 data and fax communicati on ......... ......... ...... 8 default prof ile .............. .......... ......... ......... ...... 25 definit ions ......... ............ .......... ......... ........ 60âÂÂ62 deleting contac ts .... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 51 delivery reports ............. ......... ......... ...... 48 pictu res ........ ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 50 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 32 share d WE P ke ys ........... ............ ......... ... 44 text m essage s ......... ............. ......... ......... 48 deliver y re ports ............ .......... ......... ........ 36, 46 deletin g ........ ............ .......... ......... ......... ... 48 DHCP , r enewing ........ .......... ......... ......... ......... 37 diagnosi ng faults............ .......... ......... ......... ... 39 disconnect ing from net work ....... ......... ...... 22 distribut ing p rofiles ....... .......... ............ ......... 42 diverting calls............ .......... ......... ............ ...... 3 4 E Easy connection profile........ ............ ......... ... 25 editing contac ts .... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 51 GPRS setting s ......... ............. ......... ......... 31 GSM settings ....... .......... ......... . 30, 34âÂÂ37 persona l WE P ke ys .... ............ ......... ...... 44
Inde x 64 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. picture s ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 50 profiles ........... ......... ......... .......... ...... 28âÂÂ32 securit y se ttings ............ .......... ......... .... 37 shared WEP keys ......... .......... ......... ....... 44 WLAN setting s.......... .......... ..... 28â 30, 37 endi ng net work connection........... ......... .... 22 export ing persona l WE P ke ys ..... ............. ......... .... 45 picture s ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 50 profiles ........... ......... ......... .......... ......... .... 32 F faults diagnosin g .............. ......... .......... ......... .... 39 troubles hooting .... ......... ............. ... 53âÂÂ55 forwa rdi ng calls ........... ............ ......... .......... ......... ....... 34 messag es .... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 48 G General P acket Radio Service (GPRS) .......... 9 genera l set tings .... ......... ......... .......... ............ . 33 glossa ry ......... .......... ............ .......... ......... ... 60âÂÂ62 GPRS ........ .......... ............ ......... .......... ......... ......... . 9 access points ............... .......... ......... ....... 32 pricing ......... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 10 settin gs ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 31 GSM high-speed data (HS CSD)........... ....... 10 GSM settings ............ ......... .......... ..... 30, 34â 37 advanc ed ....... ......... ......... .......... ...... 34âÂÂ37 call barring .......... ............ .......... ......... .... 35 call diverts ........ ......... .......... ......... .......... 34 cell info d isplay .............. .......... ......... .... 34 connect ion s peed ....... .......... ......... ....... 30 display incoming calls ............ ......... .... 34 messag es .... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 36 networ k sele ction .......... .......... ............ . 34 sounds ............ ......... ......... .......... ............ . 37 voice mailbox number ............ ......... .... 34 H hardw are, troubleshootin g .. ............. ......... . 54 High Speed Circuit Swit ched Data (HSCSD) . 10 history ..... .......... ............ ......... .......... ......... ....... 39 HSCSD ............... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... . 10 I importing persona l WE P ke ys .... ............ ......... ...... 45 pictu res ........ ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 50 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 32 Inbox ......... ............ ......... .......... ......... ......... ...... 46 incoming calls ........ ......... .......... ......... ............ 34 infrast ructure operating mode ......... ......... 11 inserting radi o cards ......... .......... ............ ......... ...... 20 SIM cards........... .......... ............ ......... ...... 19 installat ion........... ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 15 modifying ............. .......... ......... ......... ...... 17 trouble shooting ............... ......... ......... ... 53 uninst alling ....... ............. ......... ......... ...... 17 installat ion d isks, creating ........... ......... ...... 41 J joining ad hoc net works ............ ......... ......... 22 M Manager window ........... .......... ......... ......... ... 24 message cen tre ............ .......... ......... ......... ...... 36 message cen tre number ............ ......... ......... 36 messa ges alert to nes ......... .......... ............ ......... ...... 37 delivery reports ............. ......... ......... ...... 36 pictu re messages .......... ............ ..... 49âÂÂ50 setti ngs ........... ......... .......... ......... ............ 36 text message s ......... .......... ......... ..... 47âÂÂ49 validity per iod ........ .......... ......... ............ 36 modifying insta llation ............... ......... ......... 17 Monitor wi ndow .......... .......... ............ ......... ... 25 setti ngs ........... ......... .......... ......... ............ 33 monitor ing status .......... .......... ......... ..... 25, 39 N network autom atic selection ........ ......... ......... ... 34 name.......... ............ .......... ......... ......... ...... 28 serv ices ........... ......... .......... ......... ......... ...... 4 trouble shooting ............... ......... ......... ... 54 network connection ending ....... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... 22 esta blishing ......... .......... ......... ........ 19âÂÂ21 establish ing automatical ly .... ......... ... 33
Inde x 65 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. network profiles, See profiles Nokia Short Messaging ............. ......... ......... . 46 O ope rat ing mo des ad hoc .......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 12 infrast ructure ..... ......... ............. ......... .... 11 Outb ox .... ............. ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 46 P pack et da ta ............ ......... ......... .......... .. 9, 19, 21 passwo rds ......... ......... ......... ............. ......... ....... 37 pers onal WEP keys ........... ............. ......... 39, 43 copying to SIM card ...... .......... ............ . 41 creat ing ................ ......... .......... ......... ....... 44 editing ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 44 exporti ng ....... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 45 importing............. ......... .......... ......... ....... 45 selecti ng ........... ......... .......... ......... .......... 45 pict ure messages ........ ......... .......... .. 46, 49âÂÂ50 deletin g pict ures ............ ............. ......... . 50 drawing pictures ............ .......... ......... .... 50 editing picture s ........... .......... ............ .... 50 exporti ng pictures ............. ......... ......... . 50 importing pict ures......... ............. ......... . 50 sendi ng ........... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 49 settin gs ............. ......... .......... ......... ... 36, 48 See also m e s s a g e s PIN code request...... ......... .......... ......... ......... . 38 powe r s aving ......... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 37 pro fil es copying to SIM card ...... .......... ............ . 41 creat ing ................ ......... .......... ......... 26âÂÂ28 deletin g ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 32 distri buting ... ............ .......... ......... ......... . 42 Easy connection ....... .......... ......... .......... 25 editing ............... ......... .......... ......... ... 28âÂÂ32 exporti ng ....... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 32 importing............. ......... .......... ......... ....... 32 selecti ng ........... ......... .......... ......... .......... 26 sendi ng as text mess age ........... ......... . 32 Profi les page ............. ......... .......... ......... ... 25âÂÂ32 PUK code....... .......... ............ .......... ......... ......... . 38 R radio c ards remo ving ..... ............ .......... ......... ......... ... 22 stopping.......... ............. ......... ......... ......... 22 radio channels........ ......... .......... ............ ......... 29 removing contac ts .... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 51 delivery reports ............. ......... ......... ...... 48 pictu res ........ ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 50 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 32 radi o cards ......... .......... ............ ......... ...... 22 share d WE P ke ys ........... ............ ......... ... 44 text m essage s ......... ............. ......... ......... 48 replying to messa ges ............ ......... ......... ...... 48 reports counte rs ............. .......... ......... ......... ......... 39 diagn ostics ........ .......... ......... ......... ......... 39 history ....... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 39 resour ces ........ ......... ......... ............. ......... ......... 54 restri cting calls ............ ............. ......... ......... ... 35 S safety information ............. ......... ...... 3, 57âÂÂ58 saving persona l WE P ke ys .... ............ ......... ...... 45 pictu res ........ ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 50 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 32 security code re quest ........... ............ ......... ... 38 security in WLAN......... ............. ......... ......... ... 13 security settings .......... ............. ......... ......... ... 37 selecting connect ion types ................ ......... ......... 26 GSM network.... .......... ......... ............ ...... 3 4 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 26 sending business car ds ............ ......... ......... ......... 51 pictu re messages ............. ......... ......... ... 49 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 32 text m essage s ......... ............. ......... ......... 47 settings chat ............ ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 51 genera l ...... ......... .......... ............ ......... ...... 33 GPRS ....... ............ .......... ......... ......... ......... 31 GSM ........... ......... .......... ......... ......... .. 34âÂÂ37 GSM, advanced ................ ......... ..... 34âÂÂ37
Inde x 66 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. securit y ....... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 37 SIM services ........... ............. ......... ......... . 29 text and picture messages . ......... ....... 36 WLAN.... .......... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 37 WLAN, advanced... ......... .......... ......... .... 28 Sett ings page ......... ............ .......... ......... ... 33âÂÂ38 share d WE P ke ys ......... ......... .......... ............ .... 43 creat ing ................ ......... .......... ......... ....... 44 deletin g ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 44 editing ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 44 short mess ag es, See tex t messages , p icture messag es SIM card s inserti ng ......... ............ .......... ......... ......... . 19 manag ing c ontents ....... .......... ......... .... 41 SIM services ........... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 12 settin gs ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 29 SMS.......... .......... ............ ......... .......... ......... ....... 46 SMS application ...... ............ .......... ......... ....... 36 See also N o k i a S h o r t M e s s a g i n g soun d set tings ....... ......... ......... .......... ............ . 37 star ting chat .......... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 52 stat us indicators ............ ......... ............. ... 21âÂÂ22 stat us reports ........ ......... ......... .......... ............ . 46 stopping radio car ds ..... ............. ......... ......... . 22 T text mess ages ........... ......... .......... ..... 46, 47âÂÂ49 deletin g ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 48 forwar ding........ ......... .......... ......... .......... 48 replyi ng ....... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 48 sendi ng ........... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 47 sendi ng profil es........... .......... ......... ....... 32 settin gs ............. ......... .......... ......... ... 36, 48 See also m e s s a g e s T ools page............... ......... ......... .......... ...... 38â 40 traf fic ......... .......... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 39 tran smitting data ............. .......... ......... ......... .... 8 trouble shooting ....... ......... .......... ............ ....... 54 hardwa re .......... ............ .......... ......... ....... 54 instal lation ....... ......... .......... ............ ....... 53 networ k ............. ............ .......... ......... ....... 54 resource s........ ......... ............. ......... ......... . 54 U uninst alling ............ ......... ......... .......... ............ . 17 V Virtua l Pri vate Network (VPN) .......... ......... 1 3 voice mailbox number....... ............ ......... ...... 34 W WEP .... ............. ......... ......... .......... ......... ..... 42âÂÂ45 WEP keys, See personal WEP keys, shared WEP keys Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) ....... .. 42âÂÂ45 W i r e l e s s L o c a l A r e a N e t w o r k , See W L A N WLAN ........ ......... ......... ............. ......... ........ 10â 13 access points ....... .......... ......... ............ ... 11 ad hoc op erating mode ........ ......... ...... 12 advan ced settings ........ ......... ......... ...... 28 infras tructure operatin g mode ......... 11 monitori ng informati on ....... ......... ...... 40 networ k nam e ............ ......... ......... ......... 28 securit y ..... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 13 SIM services ......... .......... ......... ......... ...... 12 statist ics ......... ............. ......... ......... ......... 40 WLAN settings .......... .......... ......... ............ ...... 37 genera l ...... ......... .......... ............ ........ 28, 30 SIM services ......... .......... ......... ......... ...... 29 T CP/IP .. ......... ......... .......... ............ ......... ... 29
é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. LIMITE D MANUFACTUR ER'S WARRAN TY P A R T O F E U R O P E & A F R I C A R E G I O N This limited warranty s hall ap ply in part of Nokia Mobile Phones' Eur ope & Afric a Region un less a loc al warrant y exists. Nokia Corporation , Nokia Mobile Phones (âÂÂNokia âÂÂ) w a r r a n t s t h a t t h i s N O K I A p r o d u c t ( " P r o d u c t " ) i s a t t h e t i m e of its origin al purchase f ree of def ects in materials, design and workmanship subject to the following terms and conditions: 1 This limited warranty is given to th e end-purchaser of the Product ("Custom er"). It shall neither exclude nor limit i) any mandatory statutory rights of the Customer or ii) any o f t h e C u s t o m e r ' s r i g h t s a g a i n s t t h e s e l l e r / d e a l e r o f t h e Product. 2 The w arranty period is twelve (12) months from the date on which the first Custo mer purchased the Product. In case of a subsequent purch ase or other change o f owner/ user, such warranty period shall continu e for the remaining part of the twelve (12) month period and otherwise remain unaffected. This limited warranty is only valid and enforceable in the following countries: any member state of the European Union, Iceland, Norway, and Switze rland. 3 During the warra nty period Nok ia or its authorized service company will repair or replace, at Nokia's s ole discretion, a defective Product . Nokia will return the repaired Produ ct or anothe r Product to the Customer in good workin g condition. All par ts or other equipment for which replacements have been provided shall become the property of Nokia. 4 A repaired or replaced Product will not be given a prolonged or renewed warranty period. 5 T his limited warranty w ill not cover painted covers or other simila r personalized parts. In all c ases tha t require unlocking or locking of an operator SIM-lock, Nokia will first direct the Custo mer to such opera tor for unlocki ng or locking of the operator SIM-lock before repai ring or replacing the Product. 6 T his limited warranty shall not apply to deterior ations due to normal wear a nd tear . This limited warranty sha ll further not apply if: (i) the defect was caused by t he f act that th e Pr oduct has been subjected to: use in contradiction wit h the owne r's/ user manual, rough handling, exposure to moistu re, dampnes s or extreme thermal or environmental conditions or rapid changes in such conditions, corrosion, oxidation, un authorized modifications or connections, unauthorized openin g or repair, repair by use of unauthorized spar e parts, misuse, improper installation, accident, forc es of nature, spillage of food or liquid, influence from chemical products or other a cts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia (including but not limited to deficienci es in consum able parts an d breakage or damage to antennas) unless the defect was caused directly by defects in materials, design or workmansh ip; (ii) Nokia or its authorized service company was not notified by the Customer of the defect within thirty (30) days a fter the appearance of the defect within the warrant y period; (iii) the Product was not returned to Nokia or its authorized service company wit hin thirty ( 30) days after the app earance of t he defect within the warranty period; (iv) the Product serial number, the accessory date code or the IMEI number has been removed, erased, defaced, altered or is illegible; (v) the def ect was caused by a defective function of the cellular or w ireless LAN network; (vi) the defect was c aused by the fact that the Product was us ed with or connected to an a ccessory not manufactured and supplied by Nokia or used in other than its intended use; (vii) the Product software needs to be upgraded due to changes in cellular or wireless LAN network parameters; (viii) the defect was caused by a defe ctive function of the computer to which the Product was connected; (ix) the changes in t he comp uter (inclu ding but not limited t o updates or other changes in its operating s y s t e m ) t o w h i c h t h e P r o d u c t w a s c o n n e c t e d c a u s e malfunction of the Product. 7 T o claim t his limited warranty the Customer shall present either i) a legible and non-modified original wa rranty card which clearly indica tes the name and address of the seller, the date an d place of purchase, t he product type and the IMEI or other ser ial number or alternatively ii) a legible and non-modified original purchase receipt which contain s the same informati on, if such purchase receipt is presented to t he seller/dealer of the Product. 8 T his limited warranty is the Customer's sole and exclusive remedy against Nokia and Nokia's s ole and exclusive liability against the Customer for defe cts or malfunctions of the Product. This limited warranty replaces all other warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written , (non- mandatory ) statutory , contractual, in tort or otherwise. Nokia is in no e vent liable for any inci dental, consequential or in direct damage, costs or expenses. Neither is Nokia in any event liable for any direct damage, costs or expenses, if the Customer is a lega l person. 9 Any change or amendment to this limited warrant y requires Nokia's prior writ ten consent.
é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. FILL IN WITH B LOCK LE TTERS Purchase r's Name: _____ _______ __________ _______ ________ _______ Addres s: ________ _______ __________ _______ ________ _______ _____ _______ ________ _______ ________ _______ _______ ________ _______ Countr y: _____ ________ __________ _______ _______ ________ _______ Phone: _________ _______ ________ _______ _______ __________ _____ Date of Purch ase (dd /mm/yy): __ __ / __ __ / __ __ Produc t Type (on type label ): __ __ __ - __ Produc t Code (on type label): __ __ __ _ _ __ __ __ Produc t Serial No (on type label): __ __ __ __ __ __ / __ __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ / __ Place of Purchase: ____________ _______ ________ _______ ________ __ Store Name : __________ __________ _______ _______ ________ _______ Store Ad dress: ________ _______ _______ ________ _______ ________ __ _______ ________ _______ ________ _______ _______ ________ _______
2 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATIO N declare under our sole responsibility th at the produ ct DTE-1 is in conformity with the provision s of the f ollowing Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found fr om http://www.nokia.com/phones/declar ation_of_conformity/ Copyrig ht é Nokia Corporation 2002. All rights r e served. Reproduction, transfer, distributio n or storage of part or all of the contents in this docu ment in any form without the prior written permiss ion of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia and Nokia Connecting People a re registered trademarks of Noki a Corporation. Oth er product and compan y names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradena mes of their respec tive owners. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptograph ic or security protocol softwa re from RSA Security. Nokia operat es a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without pr ior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible f or any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequenti al or indirect da mages howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided "as is". Except as required by applicable law, no warrant ies of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. Nokia reserves t he right to revise thi s document or withdraw it at any time without prior n otice. The availabi lity of parti cular products may vary by region. Please che ck with the Nokia dealer nearest to you. Issue 1
For y our s afety 3 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. For your safet y R e a d t h e s e s i m p l e g u i d e l i n e s . B r e a k i n g t h e r u l e s m a y b e d a n g e r o u s o r i l l e g a l . Further detailed information is given in this manual. Do not switch the radio card on when wireless equipment use is prohibited or wh en it may cau se inte rfe re nce o r da nge r. Road safety comes first DonâÂÂt use the radio card while driv ing. Interference All radio car ds m ay get interf erence, which could affe ct performance. Switch off in hospitals Follow any regulations or rules. Swit ch the radio card off near medical equipm ent. Switch off in aircraft W i r e l e s s d e v i c e s c a n c a u s e i n t e r f e r e n c e i n a i r c r a f t . Switch off when refuelling DonâÂÂt use the radio card at a refuelling point. Do not u se near fuel or chemicals. Switch off near blasting DonâÂÂt use the radio card where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictio ns, and f ollow any regulations or rules. Use sensibly U s e o n l y i n t h e n o r m a l p o s i t i o n . D o n â t t o u c h t h e a n t e n n a u n n e c e s s a r i l y . Qualified service Only qualified personnel may repair radio card equipment. Accessories Use only approv ed acc essories. Do not co nnect incompatible products. Water-resistance Y o u r r a d i o c a r d i s n o t w a t e r - r e s i s t a n t . K e e p i t d r y . Back up copies Remember to make backup copies of all important data. Connecting to other devices W h e n c o n n e c t i n g t o a n y o t h e r d e v i c e , r e a d i t s u s e r ' s g u i d e f o r d e t a i l e d safety instruc tions. Do not connect incompatible pro ducts.
For y our s afety 4 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Network Services The radio card described in t his guide is approved for us e on the EGSM 900 and GSM 1800 net wo rks. D u a l b a n d i s a n e t w o r k d e p e n d a n t f e a t u r e . C h e c k w i t h y o u r l o c a l s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r if you can subscri be to a nd use t his feature. A number of feature s included in this guide are called Network Serv ices. These are special services that you arrange thr ough you r wireles s servic e provide r. Before y o u c a n t a k e a d v a n t a g e o f a n y o f t h e s e N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s , y o u m u s t s u b s c r i b e t o them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider. Note: Some GSM n etworks may not support all language-depe ndent characters and/or services.
Table of contents 5 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. T able of contents For your safety 3 Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Introduction 7 Data and fax communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 About data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 General P acket Radio Service (GPRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Installation 15 Installing the Nokia D2 1 1 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Uninstalling the Nokia D2 1 1 so ftware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Getting started 19 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Ending network connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Removing the radio card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Nokia D211 features 24 Manager and Monitor window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Profiles page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 To ols page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Administrator page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 WEP security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Nokia Short M essaging 46 Te xt messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Picture messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 Troubleshooting 53 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Table of contents 6 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Care and maintenance 56 Important safety information 57 Glossary 60 Index 63
Introd uction 7 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Introduction The Nokia D211 is a multimo de r adio card that combines General P acket Radio Service (GPRS), GSM high-speed data (HSCSD), a nd Wireless L ocal Area Netwo rk (WLAN). With the Nokia D 211 you can send and receive e-mai l, text mes sages, data and fax files, and access the Intern et. Note that with the Nokia D211 you cannot make or receive voice calls. The Nokia D211 operates on the GSM 900/1800 networks and IEEE 802.1 1b- c o m p l i a n t W L A N s . I t p l u g s i n t o c o m p a t i b l e p o r t a b l e c o m p u t e r s o r o t h e r d e v i c e s w i t h a t y p e I I o r I I I P C c a r d s l o t . T h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i s e q u i p p e d w i t h a n i n t e g r a t e d smart card r eader: Wired Equivalent Pr ivacy (WEP) keys and personal network p r o f i l e s t h a t m a k e m o v i n g b e t w e e n n e t w o r k s e a s y , c a n b e s t o r e d o n a S I M c a r d . Supported operati ng s ystems a re: Win dows 98 Second Edition, Windo ws Me, Windows 2000, and Win dows XP. For other supported operating systems and software u pdates, please check the Nokia Web site at www.club.nok ia.com . Importa nt! Warning: D o n o t u s e t h e r a d i o c a r d w h e n t h e u s e o f a w i r e l e s s d e v i c e i s prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Note that the radio card may cause similar interference as any cellular device (e. g. mobile phone) a n d m u s t n o t b e u s e d i n a r e a s w h e r e t h e u s e o f a n y s u c h d e v i c e i s p r o h i b i t e d . Warning: B e c a r e f u l w h e n m o v i n g y o u r c o m p u t e r s o t h a t y o u d o n o t c a u s e damage to the protruding end of th e inse rted r adio card. Warning: Using the Nokia D 211 in some cou ntries or regions may be ille gal. Consult local au thorities on the regula tions concerning the use of the Nokia D211. Note: Transmitted dat a is not en crypted by the radio card by d efault. Warning: U s e o n l y a c c e s s o r i e s a p p r o v e d b y t h e r a d i o c a r d m a n u f a c t u r e r f o r u s e w i t h t h i s p a r t i c u l a r r a d i o c a r d m o d e l . T h e u s e o f a n y o t h e r t y p e s m a y invalidate any approval or warranty applyin g to the radio card, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer.
Introd uction 8 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Data and fax c ommunication T h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 p r o v i d e s t h e f u n c t i o n a l i t y o f a w i r e l e s s m o d e m . I n o r d e r t o b e a b l e t o c o n n e c t t o a r e m o t e c o m p u t e r , t o s e n d a n d r e c e i v e f i l e s , e - m a i l a n d f a x e s , a n d to access the Int ernet, you need to take the following points into accoun t: ⢠Y ou need the appropriate dat a and fa x communications software installed on y o u r c o m p u t e r. Y o u c a n u s e t h e N o k i a D 21 1 w i t h a v a r i e t y o f c o m m e r c i a l l y available Windows 9 8 Second Edition, Windows Me, Windows 20 00, and Windows XP compatible data and fax communications applications, such a s Dial-Up Networking and HyperTer minal. ⢠The data and fax commun ications applications must be correctly configured f o r u s e w i t h t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 , a c c o r d i n g t o t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s g i v e n i n t h e documentation of these applications an d your compatible computer . R e m e m b e r t o s e l e c t t h e N o k i a D 21 1 a s t h e m o d e m f o r e a c h a p p l i c a t i o n . ⢠The data transfer and fax functi ons de pend on t he applications you h ave chosen, and not only on the computer or the N okia D 2 1 1. For information on how to use an application, ple ase refer to that applicationâÂÂs d ocumentation. ⢠Y ou need to subscribe to the corresponding data and fax services from you r service provider or net work operator . Contact your service provider for information about the availability and details of the services in your h ome network. Interne t access requires that you have subscribed to the data service and obtained an In ternet access point from your se rvice pr ovider . The Nokia D 211 can also be control led with AT commands. For more information, pleas e r efer to the Developer Manual for Nokia D211 , which can be found at www.for um.nok ia.com . About data transmissi on The Nokia D211 employs the data transmission capabilities of the WLAN and GSM n e t w o r k i n o r d e r t o s e n d a n d r e c e i v e d a t a , t o b r o w s e t h e I n t e r n e t , t o s e n d short messages and e-mai l, and to e stablish connections with othe r compu ters, for example. Data connections may be made from most location s wher e your radio card operates. However, it is recom mended that yo u mo ve the radio card to a locat ion where the strongest possible network signal can be obtained. When the signal is strong, data tra nsmission is more efficient. The following factors may impair wirele ss conn ections: Noise â E l e c t r o n i c a p p l i a n c e s a n d e q u i p m e n t c a n c a u s e r a d i o i n t e r f e r e n c e . A l s o i n areas where radio cards are prevalent, other radio cards can im pair the wir eless connecti on.
Introd uction 9 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Roaming â As the radio card user moves from one WLAN access point coverage area or GSM network cell to another, the signal strength of t he channel drops. As a c o n s e q u e n c e , t h e n e t w o r k m a y h a n d t h e u s e r o v e r t o a c o v e r a g e a r e a a n d frequen cy whe re the s ignal is st ronger. Due to varying netw ork traffic loads, r o a m i n g m a y a l s o o c c u r w h e n t h e u s e r i s s t a t i o n a r y . S u c h r o a m i n g m a y c a u s e slight delays in transm ission. Elec tros tatic discha rge â A d i s c h a r g e o f s t a t i c e l e c t r i c i t y f r o m a f i n g e r o r a conductor may cause erroneo us functions in electri cal devices. The discharge may result in unstable software operation . Network connections may become unreliable, data may become corru pted, and transmis sion halted. In those cases, end the ex isting connection (if any), stop the radio card, a nd remove it from t h e P C c a r d s l o t . T h e n r e - i n s e r t t h e r a d i o c a r d i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t a n d t r y connecting again. Dead spots and d ropouts â D ead spot s are areas where radio si gnals c annot be r e c e i v e d . D r o p o u t s o c c u r w h e n t h e r a d i o c a r d u s e r p a s s e s t h r o u g h a n a r e a w h e r e the radio signal is blocked or reduced by geographical or stru ctural o bstructions, such as concrete w alls. Signal imp airment â D i s t a n c e a n d o b s t a c l e s c a n c a u s e s i g n a l s t o b e c o m e o u t - o f - p h a s e . T h e y c a n a l s o c a u s e r e f l e c t e d s i g n a l s . B o t h s i t u a t i o n s r e s u l t i n a l o s s o f signal strength. Low signal streng th â Due to either distance or obst acles, the r adio si gnal s t r e n g t h f r o m a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t o r G S M c e l l s i t e m a y n o t b e s t r o n g o r s t a b l e enough to provide a reliable connection for communication. Therefore, to ensure the best possible communication, rememb er t o consider the fol lowing points: ⢠Data connection works best when the radio card is in a stationary position . A t t e m p t i n g w i r e l e s s d a t a c o m m u n i c a t i o n w h i l e i n a m o v i n g v e h i c l e i s n o t recommended. F ax transmission is m ore easily impaire d than data or text message transmission. ⢠D o n o t p l a c e t h e r a d i o c a r d o n a m e t a l s u r f a c e . General P acket Radio Service (GPRS) G P R S i s a p a c k e t d a t a t e c h n o l o g y w h e r e i n f o r m a t i o n i s s e n t i n s h o r t b u r s t s o f d a t a o v e r t h e m o b i l e n e t w o r k . T h e b e n e f i t o f s e n d i n g d a t a i n p a c k e t s i s t h a t t h e network is o ccupied only when sending or receiving data. GPRS a s such is a data bearer t hat enable s wireless access to data networks like the Internet . Th e applications that use GPRS are S MS mess aging an d GPRS dial-up (for example , t h e I n t e r n e t a n d e - m a i l ) . B e f o r e y o u c a n u s e G P R S t e c h n o l o g y : ⢠Y ou need t o subscr ibe t o GPRS servi ce. For availability and subscription to GPRS service, contact your service provid er o r n e t w o r k o p e r a t o r.
Introd uction 10 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. ⢠Y ou need to save the GPRS settings for t he applications used over G PRS. See âÂÂMessagesâ on page 3 6 for configurin g tex t message setti ngs. See also âÂÂCreat ing new profiles â on p age 26 a n d â D a t a a n d f a x communicatio nâ on page 8. Please refer to the Data Secur ity d o c u m e n t f o u n d o n t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 C D - R O M f o r information on security issues. Pricing for GPRS and applica tions Both the active GPRS connection and the applications used over GPRS, for example sending and receiving data and text mess ages, are priced . Fo r more detailed information on fees , contact your service provide r or network operator. High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD) The Nokia D211 enables you to use GSM high-speed data se rvices (HSCSD). The standard GSM data transmission rate is 9.6 kbit/s, but HSCSD technology allows for higher data transmission rate s, making, for exampl e, the downloading of large files faster a nd more conven ient. H S C S D t e c h n o l o g y i s b a s e d o n t h e u s e o f m u l t i p l e t i m e s l o t s a t t h e s a m e t i m e . Depending on the network, the data transmission speed in a single timeslot is 9.6 o r 1 4 . 4 k b i t / s . W h e n s e n d i n g a n d r e c e i v i n g e - m a i l , t h e 1 4 . 4 k b i t / s d a t a transmissi on s peed can be doubled u p t o 28.8 kbit/s, and in Internet co nnections a dow nload spee d of up to 43. 2 kbit/s can be achieved if supported by t he equipment o f the netw ork operator and the Int ernet service provider. The use of GSM high-speed dat a se rvices requires that yo ur network s upports HSCSD technology and that you have subscribed to th is service. For m ore information , cont act your servic e pr ovider o r net work ope rator. S e e a l s o â D a t a a n d f a x c o m m u n i c a t i o n â o n p a g e 8 . Please refer to the Data Secur ity d o c u m e n t f o u n d o n t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 C D - R O M f o r information on security issues. Wirel ess Loca l Area Net work (WLAN ) The radio card described in t his document is approv ed for use in a Wireless Local Area Netw ork (WLA N). Warning: T h i s e q u i p m e n t o p e r a t e s a t 2 . 4 - 2 . 4 8 3 5 G H z . N o t e t h a t i n F r a n c e the use of this equ ipme nt is only allowe d at the frequ enc y band of 2 .445 - 2.4835 GHz (channels 10, 11 , 12, and 13).
Introd uction 11 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. The Nokia D211 supports the following WLAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.1 1b standard ⢠D a t a r a t e s o f 1 , 2 , 5 . 5 , a n d 1 1 M b i t / s ⢠Operation at a freque ncy of 2.4 GHz using Direc t S equence Spread Spect rum (DSSS) radio t echnology ⢠Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption with keys u p to 152 bits. The Nokia D211 enables you to wirelessly connect compat ible laptop computers, h a n d - h e l d d e v i c e s , d e s k t o p P C s , a n d o t h e r d e v i c e s w i t h a t y p e I I o r I I I P C c a r d s l o t t o a w i r e d l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k t h r o u g h a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t . I n s t e a d o f c a b l e s , r a d i o w a v e s a r e u s e d t o t r a n s m i t a n d r e c e i v e d a t a o v e r t h e a i r . If you m ove the com puter to an other location within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN access point, the roaming functio nality can automatically connect your computer to another access point that belongs to the same network . As long a s y o u r e m a i n w i t h i n r a n g e o f a c c e s s p o i n t s t h a t b e l o n g t o t h e s a m e n e t w o r k , y o u r c o m p u t e r c a n s t a y c o n n e c t e d t o t h e n e t w o r k . The Nokia D211 ena bles different types of commu nication in a WLAN. There a re two operating modes t o choose from : in frastructu re a n d ad hoc . Infrastructure T h e i n f r a s t r u c t u r e o p e r a t i n g m o d e a l l o w s t w o k i n d s o f c o m m u n i c a t i o n : ⢠W i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h e a c h o t h e r t h r o u g h a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t . ⢠W i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h a w i r e d L A N s t a t i o n t h r o u g h a W L A N access point. The advantage of the infrastructure operating mode is that you can have mor e c o n t r o l o v e r n e t w o r k c o n n e c t i o n s b e c a u s e t h e y p a s s t h r o u g h a n a c c e s s p o i n t . A wireless station can access the services th at are available i n a regu lar wired LAN: compan y databas e, e-mai l, the Internet , and other netw ork reso urces, for examp le. F i g u r e 1 - I n f r a s t r u c t u r e n e t w o r k WLAN access point
Introd uction 12 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Ad hoc In the ad hoc operating mode, wireless stations send and receive data directly w ith each other ; no access poi nt is required. Simply insert the radi o cards into the s t a t i o n s , m a k e t h e n e c e s s a r y c o n f i g u r a t i o n s , a n d s t a r t c o m m u n i c a t i n g . A d h o c netwo rking is ea sy to set up, but comm unicatio n is limited to stations that are w i t h i n r a n g e . A s l o n g a s t h e s t a t i o n s a r e w i t h i n r a n g e , y o u c a n , f o r e x a m p l e , s h a r e and exchange files. See âÂÂSetting up and joining ad hoc networksâ on page 2 2 for how to set up an ad hoc network . SIM services S I M s e r v i c e s r e f e r s t o a s e r v i c e w h i c h e n a b l e s y o u t o a c c e s s t h e I n t e r n e t v i a y o u r service providerâÂÂs or network operatorâÂÂs own public netw ork. Your service provi der may, for exa mple, offer y ou the possibili ty to check data f rom your company i n t r a n e t , s e n d a n d r e c e i v e e - m a i l , a n d s a v e d o c u m e n t s . S I M s e r v i c e s a r e u s u a l l y available in public places such as hote ls, airports, railway stations, business centres, and corporat e buildings. Note: Before you can take advantage of the S IM services, you must subscribe to these serv ices from your service pro vider or network oper ator and obtain instructions for us e. A S I M c a r d i s u s e d a s a m e a n s f o r u s e r i d e n t i f i c a t i o n : t h e d a t a s t o r e d o n t h e S I M card is r ead, and if valid, you are allowe d to c onnect to the Internet and intrane ts. The SIM card is provided by the ser vice prov ider or netw ork operator. Accountin g data, such as used acces s time and/or transferr ed data, is passed from the network on to the serv ice provid er for billing purposes. Accoun ting be gins whe n the wire less s ta tion is a ut hent icat ed and ends when the wireles s stati on logs off. Note: The actual invoice for servic es from your service provider may vary, depending upon network featur es, roun ding-off for billing, taxe s and so f orth. F i g u r e 2 - A d h o c n e t w o r k
Introd uction 13 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Securit y in WLAN Security issues should always be carefully considered to ens ure the secur e transmissi on of data in both wired and wireless LANs. In current wireless systems, for example, WLAN access points need t o authenticate wireless stations to prevent unau thorised acces s t o the net work. Authenticat ion is a service that c o n f i r m s t h e i d e n t i t y o f a n e n t i t y , s u c h a s a u s e r o r a c o m p u t e r , o r c o n f i r m s t h e origin of a transmitted message. The Nokia D211 supports the Wir ed E quivalent Privacy (WEP) protocol, which offers basic protection in WLAN. The W EP protocol utilises the RC4 algorithm with a n u p t o 1 5 2 - b i t s e c r e t k e y , w h i c h e n c r y p t s d a t a b e f o r e i t i s t r a n s m i t t e d o v e r r a d i o w a v e s . W h e n t h e w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s i n a W L A N w i s h t o c o m m u n i c a t e u s i n g W E P , t h e y m u s t h a v e t h e s a m e W E P k e y i n p o s s e s s i o n . T h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i s a l s o c o m p a t i b l e w i t h l e a d i n g V i r t u a l P r i v a t e N e t w o r k ( V P N ) clients over GPRS and WLAN. VPN is recommended for m ore secure network access. The Nokia D 211 is equipped with an int egrated smart card reader. SIM cards an d s m a r t c a r d r e a d e r s p r o v i d e a t o o l f o r m a n a g i n g s e c u r e u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n i n a W L A N . S I M c a r d s a l s o p r o v i d e a n e a s y w a y f o r u s e r s t o c a r r y a n a u t h e n t i c a t i o n d e v i c e w i t h t h e m . O n a S I M c a r d u s e r s c a n s t o r e i m p o r t a n t i n f o r m a t i o n , s u c h a s W E P k e y s a n d n e t w o r k p r o f i l e s . The smart car d reader r eads the data stored on the comp uter chip and sends it to the network for processing. The SIM card is protected by a PIN code; to access the content s of the SIM card, you need to enter the correct PIN code. Cautio n: Keep all miniature SIM cards out of small childrenâÂÂs re ach. Pleas e r efer to the Data Securi ty document found on the product CD-ROM for m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n o n s e c u r i t y i s s u e s . Antennas T h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 h a s b u i l t - i n a n t e n n a s i n s i d e a n e x t e n s i o n b o x . I n t h i s d o c u m e n t antenna r e f e r s t o t h e e x t e n s i o n b o x a n d t h e a n t e n n a s i n s i d e i t . F i g u r e 3 - E x t e n s i o n b o x o f t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1
Introd uction 14 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. W h e n c o n n e c t i n g t o a W L A N , m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e a n t e n n a i s p o i n t i n g t o w a r d s t h e W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t a n d p l a c e d i n a n o p e n a r e a . D o n o t c o v e r t h e a n t e n n a . Use onl y the suppl ied a ntenna. Unauth oris ed ante nnas, mo dific atio ns, or attachments could damage the radio card and may violate regulations governing radio devices.
Installation 15 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Installation T h e r e a r e s o m e s l i g h t d i f f e r e n c e s i n t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p r o c e s s b e t w e e n t h e d i f f e r e n t Windows operating systems. If the installation differs from t he steps described below, follow the instructions on the screen. The Nokia D211 sof tware requires 20 MB of free disk space. Install ing the No kia D2 1 1 software Note: Do not insert the radio car d into your computer until the in stallation program instructs you to do so. 1 E x i t a l l W i n d o w s p r o g r a m s . I n s e r t t h e C D - R O M i n t o t h e C D - R O M d r i v e o f your computer . If the CD-ROM is not la unched automatically , go to y our CD-ROM drive (e.g. drive D) and double-click on St art.exe . 2 Select the language for the CD-ROM and installation program and read through and acce pt the Nokia license agreeme nt. If you do not a ccept the l i c e n s e a g r e e m e n t , y o u c a n n o t u s e t h e C D - R O M . 3 The main screen of t he CD-ROM op ens. Clic k Install to start the in stal latio n. 4 The Welcome p age of the installation w izard opens. Click Next to continue . 5 Read through and accept the Nokia license agreeme nt. If you do not accept the license agreemen t, you cannot use the softwar e a nd the instal lation procedure stops. Click I Ac cept t o a c c e p t t h e l i c e n s e a g r e e m e n t . 6 Select the destina tion folder for the software. The default folder is C:\Program F i l e s \ N o k i a \ N o k i a D 2 1 1 . I f y o u w a n t t o i n s t a l l t h e s o f t w a r e i n a n o t h e r d r i v e o r folder , click Brows e . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e c o r r e c t d e s t i n a t i o n f o l d e r, click Next . Not e: You cannot install the Nokia D211 soft ware on a network drive. 7 S e l e c t t h e t y p e o f i n s t a l l a t i o n y o u w a n t . T h e Admin ist rator option is for system administ rators only. Custom allows you to choose the individual software component s to be in stalled, and is recomme nded f or advanced u sers. Typical installs t he most common software components. This opt ion is r ecommended f o r m o s t u s e r s . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e d e s i r e d t y p e o f i n s t a l l a t i o n , click Next . 8 Check the inst allation settings. To accept them, cli ck Next . To change the settings, click Back , m a k e t h e c h a n g e s , a n d t h e n c l i c k Next . Th e installation program starts copying the files. 9 When the in stallation program pr ompts you to insert the radio card, insert it i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t o f y o u r c o m p u t e r a s s h o w n i n F i g u r e 4 . N o t e t h a t t h e r a d i o
Installation 16 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. c a r d i s n o t i n s e r t e d a l l t h e w a y i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t a n d t h e r e i s a g a p b e t w e e n the protruding exten sion box and the compute r . Do not use excess force when inserting the card. In the Wind ows 2000 operatin g system you are informe d that no dig ital signature was found. Click Yes in each dialog box t o conti nue w ith the installation. In Windows XP , the operating system opens Found New Hardware wizards. For each of these wizards, fi rst select the optio n Instal l the soft ware automatica lly , and then select C ontinue Any way to contin ue with th e installation. 10 The Completion page informs you when the installation is completed. Re move the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive and click Finish . Y ou may need to restart your computer . 11 A dialog box asks if you want t o create a network profile now . Remember that y o u c a n c r e a t e a n d e d i t y o u r o w n n e t w o r k p r o f i l e s a t a n y t i m e . I f y o u d o n o t w a n t t o c r e a t e a p r o f i l e , c l i c k No a n d t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p r o c e d u r e i s c o m p l e t e d . I f y o u w a n t t o c r e a t e a p r o f i l e , c l i c k Yes a n d t h e W e l c o m e w i n d o w of the profile wizard opens. See âÂÂCreating new profilesâ on page 26 f o r m o r e information. Note: If you want ot her applications to be able to use the smart c ard reader o f t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 , y o u n e e d t o i n s t a l l s e p a r a t e l y a P C / S C ( P e r s o n a l C o m p u t e r S m a r t C a r d ) c o m p l i a n t s m a r t c a r d d r i v e r o n y o u r c o m p u t e r . I n s t a l l t h e s m a r t card dr iver only if you want to use ot her applications or special types of s m a r t c a r d s w i t h t h e s m a r t c a r d r e a d e r o f t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 . T o i n s t a l l t h e driver, select Custom as the installa tion type (see step 7 abov e) an d select t he PC/SC smart card drive r compone nt. In the Windows 98 and Me operati ng systems you must hav e the Micros oft Smar t Car d Base Component s 1.0 or later installed. F i g u r e 4 - I n s e r t i n g t h e r a d i o c a r d
Installation 17 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Modi fyin g the in stal lati on You can alter t he in stallation of the Nokia D211 by adding or removing components, for example . 1 E x i t a l l W i n d o w s p r o g r a m s . I n s e r t t h e C D - R O M i n t o t h e C D - R O M d r i v e o f your computer . If the CD-ROM is not la unched automatically , go to y our CD-ROM drive (e.g. drive D) and double-click on St art.exe . 2 Select the language for the CD-ROM and installation program and read through and acce pt the Nokia license agreeme nt. If you do not a ccept the l i c e n s e a g r e e m e n t , y o u c a n n o t u s e t h e C D - R O M . 3 The main screen of t he CD-ROM op ens. Clic k Install to start the in stal latio n. 4 W h e n t h e W e l c o m e p a g e o f t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n m a i n t e n a n c e p r o g r a m o p e n s , choose from the foll owing opt ions: Modify â Y ou can install new com ponents or remo ve existing ones. Update â Y o u c a n u p d a t e t h e i n s t a l l e d c o m p o n e n t s a n d n e t w o r k p r o f i l e s . Uninstall â Y o u c a n r e m o v e t h e N o k i a D 2 11 p r o g r a m f i l e s a n d d r i v e r s f r o m y o u r computer . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e o p t i o n , c l i c k Next . 5 T h e s e l e c t e d w i z a r d o p e n s . M a k e t h e c h a n g e s a n d c l i c k Ne xt t o c o n t i n u e . 6 Check the set tings. To accept them, click Next . To change the setti ngs, click Back , make the changes, and then click Ne xt . 7 The modification starts. The Comple tion page informs you w hen the modification is completed. Click Finis h . Uninstalling the Nokia D2 1 1 software Caution: B e f o r e y o u s t a r t u n i n s t a l l i n g t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 s o f t w a r e , y o u m u s t first stop the radio card and then remove it f rom t he PC card slot of the computer. See âÂÂRemoving th e r adio cardâ on page 22 for more inform ation. Close all dialog boxes in t he use r interface before unin stalling the Nokia D211. To u nins tall the Nok ia D211 software: 1 From the St art menu, select Se ttings and then click Cont rol Pa nel . Click A d d / Remove Programs . 2 F r o m t h e l i s t o f p r o g r a m s , s e l e c t Nokia D211 a n d c l i c k Add/Remove . 3 The Welcome page of the uninstallation wizard opens. If you do not want profiles and sett ings configured on the Settings page removed, select the Keep a l l p r o f i l e s a n d o t h e r s e t t i n g s c h e c k b o x . I f y o u w a n t t o s a v e a l l d a t a r e l a t i n g t o t h e S M S a p p l i c a t i o n , f o r e x a m p l e t e x t a n d p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s y o u h a v e s e n t or receiv ed, selec t the K e e p a l l d a t a f r o m t h e S M S a p p l i c a t i o n check box.
Installation 18 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Click Next t o c o n t i n u e . 4 Check the uninstallation settings. To accept the m, clic k Next . To cha nge the settings, click Back , m a k e t h e c h a n g e s , a n d t h e n c l i c k Next . 5 The uninstallation starts. The Co mpletion page inform s you when the uninstallation is comple ted. Click Finis h .
Getting started 19 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Getting started W i t h t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 y o u c a n : ⢠establish a General Pack et Radio Service (GPRS) connection where information i s s e n t i n s h o r t b u r s t s o f d a t a o v e r t h e c e l l u l a r n e t w o r k . T h e b e n e f i t o f s e n d i n g data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. GPRS is ideal for applications which transmit data in short bursts, such as Web browsers. The data rate can be up to 40.2 kbit/s. Y ou need t o subscribe to the GPRS serv ice. ⢠c o n n e c t t o a G S M n e t w o r k w h e r e y o u c a n s e n d a n d r e c e i v e t e x t a n d p i c t u r e messages. Y ou can also connect to the Internet or your e-mail by making a data c a l l , w h i c h e n a b l e s d a t a t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e s o f u p t o 1 4 . 4 k b i t / s . Y o u c a n m a k e GSM h igh-speed data calls if your netwo rk s upports High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD) t echnology and you have subscribed to GSM h igh- speed data serv ices. H SCSD technolog y is especially suited fo r active file transfer , and the data rate can be up to 43.2 kbit/s. ⢠connec t to a Wirele ss Local Area Network (WLAN) and send and r eceive data like in a regular wired LAN. The data rate in WLAN can be up to 1 1 Mbit/s. Connecting to a netwo rk T o b e a b l e t o c o n n e c t t o a n e t w o r k y o u n e e d a n e t w o r k p r o f i l e . Easy connection profile with pre-def ined settin gs is automatically c reated during softwa re i n s t a l l a t i o n . T h i s p r o f i l e e n a b l e s n e t w o r k a c c e s s w i t h o u t y o u r n e e d i n g t o conf igur e any settin gs. If you want to create a profile yourself, see âÂÂCreatin g new pro files â o n p age 26 for mo re inf orma tion . Y o u n e e d a S I M c a r d t o b e a b l e t o e s t a b l i s h a G S M o r G P R S c o n n e c t i o n . To c reate a network connect ion: 1 Slide the SIM card into the smart card slot of the No kia D21 1. Make s ure that the m etal con ta cts o f the S I M c a r d a r e f a c i n g d o w n a n d t h a t t h e b e v e l l e d c o r n e r i s o n t h e r i g h t . N o t e t h a t t h e r a d i o c a r d d o e s not support 5 V olt SIM c ards.
Getting started 20 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. 2 I n s e r t t h e r a d i o c a r d f i r m l y i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t o f he computer . N o t e t h a t t h e r a d i o c a r d i s n o t i n s e r t e d a l l t h e w a y i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t a n d t h e r e i s a g a p b e t w e e n t h e protruding ext ension box a nd the com puter . Do not use excess force when inserting the card. 3 Switch on your comput er . 4 I f y o u a r e u s i n g a S I M c a r d , e n t e r t h e P I N c o d e a n d c l i c k OK . Y ou can enter the PIN code be fore logging on to a network. 5 During the log on a dialog box opens in the top left-hand corner of the screen. To sele ct the profile and conne ction type at this stage, click Selec t . 6 The Select Connecti on dialog box opens. See Figure 5 . From the list of profile s open the profil e and selec t the conne cti on type you w ant to use. WLAN â C o n n e c t s y o u t o a w i r e l e s s l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k w h e r e y o u c a n s e n d and r eceive dat a. GSM â Allows you to make data calls and utilise GSM high-speed data services if your network supp orts HSCSD techn ology and you have subscribed to the service. GPRS â Yo u c a n e s t a b l i s h a G P R S c o n n e c t i o n a n d s e n d p a c k e t d a t a . Yo u n e e d t o s u b s c r i b e t o t h e G P R S s e r v i c e . OFF â D i s c o n n e c t s t h e r a d i o c a r d f r o m t h e n e t w o r k a n d t u r n s o f f a l l r a d i o s . 7 Click OK to establish a network connection. Fig ure 5 - Select Conne ctio n dialog box
Getting started 21 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Tip: Y ou can acce ss the Select Conne ction dialog box also by r ight-clicking t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i c o n o n t h e t a s k b a r , o r b y o p e n i n g t h e Profil es p a g e o f t h e Manager window and clicking Select . If the t askbar icon is not visible , see page 33 for more info rmation. Tip: Y o u c a n m a n a g e n e t w o r k c o n n e c t i o n s a l s o b y u s i n g t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i c o n on the taskbar. Right-click the icon a nd c lick Connect to conne ct to SIM services. To make a data call, click Dial , and to send packet data, click Activat e . See âÂÂConnection status indicatorsâ below for more information. If the taskbar icon is not visible , s ee pa ge 33 for mo re information. Warning: D o n o t u s e t h e r a d i o c a r d w h e n t h e u s e o f a w i r e l e s s d e v i c e i s prohibi ted or when i t may cause interference or danger. N ote that the radio c a r d m a y c a u s e s i m i l a r i n t e r f e r e n c e a s a n y c e l l u l a r d e v i c e ( e . g . m o b i l e p h o n e ) a n d m u s t n o t b e u s e d i n a r e a s w h e r e t h e u s e o f a n y s u c h d e v i c e i s prohibi ted. Conn ecti on status indica tors Taskbar icons and icons on the Pro files p a g e i n d i c a t e t h e s t a t u s o f t h e n e t w o r k connecti on. Ready for data call â Y ou have establishe d a connection to a GSM network a n d c a n s e n d a n d r e c e i v e t e x t m e s s a g e s . T o a c c e s s t h e I n t e r n e t o r y o u r e - m a i l by us ing GSM high-spee d data services, you need to make a data call. Click Dia l t o m a k e a d a t a c a l l . The use of GSM high-s peed data serv ices requires that your network support s HSCSD technology and that you have s ubscribed to t his se rvice. For m ore information, cont act y our ser vice provider or network ope rator. Data call to [ p h o n e n u m b e r ] â G S M d a t a c a l l i s a c t i v e . T o f i n i s h t h e c a l l , c l i c k End Call . Ready to activa te GPRS â Y ou have e stablished a connect ion t o a GSM network that support s packet data sending (GPRS). Y ou can send and receive t e x t m e s s a g e s . T o a c c e s s t h e I n t e r n e t o r y o u r e - m a i l b y u s i n g G P R S , y o u n e e d to e stablish a GPRS connection. Click Activat e to establish a GPRS connection . Y ou need to subscribe t o the GPRS service. For availabi lity and subscription to packet data services, please contact your serv ice provider or netwo rk operator . GPRS active â G P R S c o n n e c t i o n i s n o w a c t i v e . T o e n d t h e c o n n e c t i o n , c l i c k Deac tivat e . Lin ked to (access p oint name) â You have establi shed a conne ction to a WLAN acc ess point. To connect to the SIM s ervices, click Co nnect . The Connect button is acti vated only whe n the wireles s station has detected a service in the network, ot herwise the button remains inacti ve.
Getting started 22 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Conne cted to SIM serv ices â Y o u h a v e e s t a b l i s h e d a c o n n e c t i o n t o S I M services. To end the conne ction, click Disconnec t . B e f o r e y o u c a n t a k e a d v a n t a g e o f t h e S I M s e r v i c e s , y o u m u s t s u b s c r i b e t o the se se rvic es fro m you r serv ice provi de r or net work opera to r and obt ai n instructions for u se. A d h o c n e t w o r k â Y ou have either established or joi ned an ad hoc network. No network â Y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d Off as a connection type and ar e not conne cted to any networ k. Setting up and joining ad hoc networks A d h o c n e t w o r k s a l l o w w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s t o c o m m u n i c a t e d i r e c t l y w i t h e a c h o t h e r w i t h o u t a n y W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t s . T h e s t a t i o n s c a n , f o r i n s t a n c e , s h a r e f o l d e r s . O n e user creates the ad hoc network and other users then join the ne twork. See âÂÂWireless Local Area Network (WLAN)â on page 1 0 for more information on ad hoc network s. To c onnect to an ad hoc network: 1 On the Pro files page, select the General t a b a n d c l i c k Select . 2 The Sel ect Connecti on dialog box opens. Open the Easy connecti on prof ile and select the W LAN (ad hoc) connection type. Click OK . 3 If you are star ting an ad hoc networ k, type the network name. If you are joining a network, select the network name from the list box. C lick OK . Tip: Create your own profile for a d hoc networking with the profile w izard if you use the ad hoc operating mode freque ntly. This saves you from having to s e l e c t a n e t w o r k e a c h t i m e a n d a l l o w s f o r q u i c k e r a c c e s s . S e e âÂÂCreating new profil esâ on page 26 for more information. Ending netwo rk connectio ns Closing the Mo nitor or Manager window does not quit the progr am or end an existin g n etwork connection. To end a connection, select the connection type Off for a profile . See Figure 5 on page 20. You can end the network connection also by stopping and removing the radio card. Removing the radio card You should always stop the radio card before removing it from the PC card slot of your computer. To stop the card, right-click the Nokia D211 icon on the t askbar
Getting started 23 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. and s elect the option Stop card . I f t h e t a s k b a r i c o n i s n o t v i s i b l e , s e e p a g e 3 3 f o r more informat ion. Caution: The Windows 98 Second Edition operating system stops all PC cards w h e n a n e w P C c a r d i s i n s e r t e d i n t o t h e c o m p u t e r . I f y o u i n s e r t a n o t h e r P C c a r d i n t o y o u r c o m p u t e r , m a k e s u r e t h a t y o u f i r s t s t o p t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 a n d r e m o v e i t f r o m t h e P C c a r d s l o t . O t h e r w i s e y o u m a y l o s e t h e n e t w o r k connection, which may result in loss of data.
Nokia D211 f eatures 24 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Nokia D2 1 1 features Manager and Monitor window The user interface of the Nokia D211 consists of t he Monitor window and the Manager window. T h e M a n a g e r w i n d o w i s t h e m a i n u s e r i n t e r f a c e o f t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 . Y o u c a n a c c e s s the Manager window by right-clicking the Nokia D211 icon on t he taskbar and by s e l e c t i n g M a n a g e r w i n d o w f r o m t h e s h o r t c u t m e n u . I f t h e t a s k b a r i c o n i s n o t visible, see page 33 for more informati on. The Manager window consists of the following pages: Profiles, Setting s, and Tools. The Administrator page is used by system administrators. The number of page s may vary depe nding on which pages were sele cted during the install ation. You can v i e w t h e d i f f e r e n t p a g e s b y c l i c k i n g t h e i c o n s o n t h e i c o n b a r o n t h e l e f t . The Manager wind ow is us ed for managing profiles, configuring settings, and viewing network status. F i g u r e 6 - M a n a g e r w i n d o w
Nokia D211 f eatures 25 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Usin g t he Monito r w ind ow The Monitor window is a small window displaying information on the current network connectio n. The followin g inf ormation is a vailabl e in the Monitor window: connection type, amount of sent and re ceived data, duratio n of the connection, signal strength or WLAN connection quality, and data flow. To open the Monitor window, right-click the Nokia D211 icon on the taskbar and select Mo nitor window . I f t h e t a s k b a r i c o n i s n o t v i s i b l e , s e e p a g e 3 3 f o r m o r e information . If you want the Monitor window to open automatically each time t he radio card is inserted, go to the Setting s p a g e , Genera l t a b . S e l e c t t h e Open Monito r w indow autom atically option. The Monitor window displays both the amount of sent and receive d data, and the d u r a t i o n o f t h e a c t i v e c o n n e c t i o n . T h e d a t a c o u n t e r u n i t i s a k i l o b y t e . W h e n t h e data counter is display ed, click on it and the connection timer is displayed instead. Note: T h e a c t u a l i n v o i c e f o r c a l l s a n d s e r v i c e s f r o m y o u r s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r m a y vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for b illing, taxes and so f orth. The signal strength indicator shows the strength and quality of the radio signal b e t w e e n t h e r a d i o c a r d a n d a G S M b a s e s t a t i o n a t y o u r c u r r e n t l o c a t i o n . I n W L A N , the indicator shows the quality of the radio signal between a radio card and a WLA N ac ces s po int . Re mem ber t hat the stren gth o f th e rad io s igna l i s af fec ted by distance and obstacles. The data flow indicator shows the relative speed at which data is transf erred. Profiles pa ge A profile is a group of networ k-specific and Windows networkin g setti ngs. Profiles enabl e easy transfer from one network to anothe r withou t havin g to rem ember all the diffe rent settin gs. On the Profiles page you can create new profiles, modify and delete them. Profiles can b e sav ed to and ope ned fr om a file. You can also s end profiles as text messages. Profiles are store d on a har d disk or SIM card. One profile with pre-defined settings is automatically created during softwa re installation. This Easy conne ction p r o f i l e e n a b l e s n e t w o r k a c c e s s w i t h o u t y o u r F i g u r e 7 - M o n i t o r w i n d o w
Nokia D211 f eatures 26 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. needing to confi gure any settings. Note that this profile cannot be edited, deleted, exporte d, or sen t as a text message. Selecti ng a profile and connecti on type You need to select a network profile and connection type suitable for the network in which y ou want the radio card to operate. 1 On the Pro files page, select the General t a b a n d c l i c k Select . 2 The Sel ect Connecti on dialog box opens. See Figure 5 on page 20 . From the list of profiles open the profile and select the connection type you want to use. Click OK . If you selected WLAN conn ection type, you are now connected to a WLAN access point. To connect to SIM serv ices, click Co nnect . If you selected GSM or GPRS c onnection type, you are connec ted to a GSM n e t w o r k , b u t t o m a k e a d a t a c a l l y o u h a v e t o c l i c k Dial, o r t o s e n d p a c k e t d a t a you have to click Activate . I f y o u s e t t h e c o n n e c t i o n t y p e t o Off , the radio card is disconnec ted f rom the network. See âÂÂConnection status indicatorsâ on page 2 1 for a detailed desc ript ion of t he vario us netw ork stat uses. Tip: You can access the Sel ect C onne ction dialog box also by right -clicking t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i c o n o n t h e t a s k b a r . I f t h e t a s k b a r i c o n i s n o t v i s i b l e , s e e page 33 for mor e infor mation. Tip: Y ou c an m an age net wo rk co nne cti ons a ls o by us ing the No kia D211 ic on o n t h e t a s k b a r . R i g h t - c l i c k t h e i c o n a n d c l i c k Co nnect to connect t o SIM services. To make a data call, click Dial , and to se nd packet data, clic k Activa te . See âÂÂConnec tion s tatus indicatorsâ on page 21 for more informat ion. If the tas kbar i con i s no t v isible, see page 33 for m ore information. Note: W h e n y o u c h a n g e a p r o f i l e o r c o n n e c t i o n t y p e , y o u m a y n e e d t o change your W eb browserâÂÂs proxy se ttings or domain settings for Windows networki ng. Crea ting n ew profile s By cr eating different profiles for diffe rent networks, you can easily switch from one netwo rk to another witho ut having to memorise the n etwor k settings. 1 On the Pro files page, select the Modify t a b a n d c l i c k New . 2 The Welcome page of the profile wizard open s. T o continue, c lick Next . 3 Give a name for the ne w profile . The name can consist of a maximum of 25 alphanumer ic ch aracters. Select the appropriate connection type. Y ou can use more than one connection type with each profile. Click Next .
Nokia D211 f eatures 27 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. 4 If you selected WLAN conn ection type, you hav e to specify the following WLAN options: Operating mode â S e l e c t o n e o f t h e t w o a v a i l a b l e o p e r a t i n g m o d e s . I n t h e infrast ructure mode, computers can communicate with each othe r and with w i r e d L A N s t a t i o n s t h r o u g h a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t . I n t h e a d h o c m o d e , computer s can send and receive data directly wit h ea ch oth er . No access point is nee ded. See âÂÂWirele ss Local Area Network (WLAN)â o n page 1 0 for more informa tion. Network name â T y p e t h e n e t w o r k n a m e a s d e f i n e d b y t h e s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r, o r s e l e c t o n e f r o m t h e l i s t b o x . I n t h e a d h o c o p e r a t i n g m o d e , the users themselve s name the WLAN . The network name can consis t of a m a x i m u m o f 3 2 a l p h a n u m e r i c c h a r a c t e r s . B y d e f a u l t , t h e n e t w o r k n a m e i s case-sensit ive. T o c o n t i n u e , c l i c k Next . 5 If your local area network does not have a D HCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server , whi ch woul d assign an IP a ddress for t he radio card automatically , you need to specify t he IP addr ess, s ubnet mask, and default gat eway settin gs man ually . Ask yo ur syst em admi nist rat or fo r the corre ct values. Note: M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e Manage TCP/IP proper ties toget her with profil es c h e c k b o x i s s e l e c t e d ( Setti ngs p a g e , Gener al t a b ) . I f t h i s c h e c k box is not se lected , th e T CP/I P s etti ngs are man aged by netw ork se ttings , which can be confi gured in the Control Panel o f your computer. 6 I f y o u s e l e c t e d G S M c o n n e c t i o n t y p e , y o u h a v e t o s p e c i f y t h e f o l l o w i n g settin gs: GSM conne ction me thod â S e l e c t Analog if yo u are using a modem connec tion. If you are us ing an ISDN con nection, se lect ISDN V. 110 o r IS DN V. 120 , depending on which ISDN standard your Inte rnet service pr ovider supports. GSM connection speed â T h e u s e o f G S M h i g h - s p e e d d a t a s e r v i c e s i n c l u d e t h e u s e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g d a t a t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e s : 9 . 6 k b i t / s , 1 4 . 4 k b i t / s , 1 9 . 2 k b i t / s , 28.8 kbit/s, and 4 3.2 kbit/s. Select the st andard 9 .6 kbit /s GSM data transmissio n rate if the network you are using does not suppor t HSCSD technology. See âÂÂGSM propert iesâ on page 30 for more inform ation on data transmissio n r ates. Note: The use of GSM high-s peed dat a service s require s that your network supports H SCSD technology and that you have subscrib ed to this s e r v i c e . G S M h i g h - s p e e d d a t a s e r v i c e s m a y c o s t m o r e t h a n n o r m a l G S M data services. Contact your service provider or network operator for more informat ion. Dial-up connect ion â Select a dial-u p connectio n from the list or create a new dial-up connection. Dial-up networking connects you to remote networks using your radio card as a modem or I SDN adapt er . T o c o n t i n u e , c l i c k Next .
Nokia D211 f eatures 28 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. 7 If you sel ected GPRS conne ction type, you have to specify the GPRS access p o i n t n a m e . Yo u o b t a i n t h e a c c e s s p o i n t n a m e f r o m y o u r s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r o r network operator . If you select Use access point p rovi ded by network , the network will connect you to an available GPRS access point automati cally if this feature is su pported by the network . Click Next . 8 T h e C o m p l e t i o n p a g e o f t h e p r o f i l e w i z a r d i n f o r m s y o u w h e n t h e c r e a t i o n o f a new profile is com pleted. Click Finish . T o t a k e t h e n e w p r o f i l e i n t o u s e , y o u m u s t f i r s t s e l e c t i t . S e e â S e l e c t i n g a p r o f i l e and c onnection typeâ on page 2 6 for more information. Edit ing profil es 1 On the Profil es p a g e , s e l e c t t h e Modify t a b a n d t h e n s e l e c t a p r o f i l e f r o m t h e list. Click Edit . 2 M a k e t h e n e c e s s a r y c h a n g e s a n d c l i c k OK . Profile-specific settings that can be modified are e xplained on pages 28 â 32. The Easy con nection p r o f i l e a n d p r o f i l e s t h a t a r e s a v e d t o a S I M c a r d c a n n o t be edited. Note: It is rec ommended that you do not edit a profile that is currently in use. WLAN properties: G eneral tab Use W LAN connect ion with thi s p rofi le Select this check box if you want to use the profile for accessing a WLAN . Opera ting mode Select one of the two available operating modes. In the infrastructure mode, computer s can communicate with each othe r and with w ired LAN s tations through a WLAN access poin t. In the ad hoc mode, computer s can send and recei ve d ata di rectly with ea ch other. No access point is need ed. See â Wireless L o c a l A r e a N e t w o r k ( W L A N ) â o n p a g e 1 0 f o r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n . Network name Networ k name is t h e n a m e o f t h e W L A N a s d e f i n e d b y t h e s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r . I n the ad h oc operating mode, the users themselves name the WLAN. Y ou can add a new network name to the list, edit an existi ng one, or delete a name. The network n a m e c a n c o n t a i n a m a x i m u m o f 3 2 c h a r a c t e r s , a n d i s c a s e - s e n s i t i v e b y d e f a u l t . Conf igure settin gs manuall y There are a number of advance d WLAN setting s (fr agmentation thresho ld, listen interval, RTS threshold, security poli cy, etc.), which are conf igured automatically. Select this check box and click Ad vanced if you want to specify a new value manually.
Nokia D211 f eatures 29 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Caution: Do not change the settin gs manually unless you are sure how each setting a ffect s syst em performance. System performance may drop dramatically if au tomatic settings ar e not u sed. By de fault, you are automatically alloc ated an available radio frequen cy channe l witho ut n eedin g t o sp ecif y on e. Yo u ca n, h owev er, also selec t a par ticu lar c hann el yourself: select Chan nel from the list of propertie s, clear the Automatic check box a n d s e l e c t a c h a n n e l f r o m t h e l i s t . M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 a n d t h e W L A N access point are using th e s ame c hannel. Warning: Using the Nokia D211 in some countries or regions may be illegal. Consult local authorities on the regulations concernin g the use of the Nokia D211. Warning: T h i s e q u i p m e n t o p e r a t e s a t 2 . 4 - 2 . 4 8 3 5 G H z . N o t e t h a t i n F r a n c e the use of this equi pme nt is only allo wed at the frequen cy b and of 2.445 - 2.4835 GHz (channels 10, 11, 12, a nd 13). Use WEP s ecurity Select this check box and click WEP Keys if you want to use Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) keys f or protecting the inform ation transmitte d in WLAN. See âÂÂWEP securit yâ on page 42 for mo re information. WLAN propert ies: TCP/IP tab A u t o m a t e d I P s e t t i n g s ( D H C P ) a r e e n a b l e d b y d e f a u l t . W h e n u s i n g D H C P ( D y n a m i c Host Configuration Protocol), you do not have to modify your IP setting s when you change your location. I f y o u r l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k d o e s n o t h a v e a D H C P s e r v e r , w h i c h w o u l d a s s i g n an IP address for the radio card automat ically, you need to specify the IP addresses manually. The advance d TCP/IP settings can also be specified and c onfigured manually. Ask your sys tem adminis trator for the corr ect valu es. WLAN properties: SIM Services tab Use SIM servic es w ith this profile SIM services refers to a service that enables you to acce ss t he Internet via you r service providerâÂÂs or network operatorâÂÂs own public netw ork. Your service provi der may, for example , offer you the possibility of c hecking data from your company i n t r a n e t , s e n d a n d r e c e i v e e - m a i l , a n d s a v e d o c u m e n t s . S I M s e r v i c e s a r e u s u a l l y available in public places such as hote ls, airports, railway stations, business centres, and corporat e buildings. A SI M card is used as a means for user identification and billing. The SIM card is provided by the service provider or netwo rk opera tor. Note: B e f o r e y o u c a n t a k e a d v a n t a g e o f S I M s e r v i c e s , y o u m u s t s u b s c r i b e t o these services from your service provider or network ope rator and obtain inst ru cti on s for use .
Nokia D211 f eatures 30 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Service prov ider domain Type the domain name, as in company.com . You cann ot connect to SIM services without specif ying the doma in name. Y ou o btain the name fr om your service provider or network operator . Prom pt w hen a SI M service i s detected W h e n y o u a r e c o n n e c t e d t o a W L A N a n d a S I M s e r v i c e i s d e t e c t e d , y o u a r e a s k e d whethe r yo u want to get c onnecte d. On ce you have confirmed that you want to get c onnected, you will be authenticated to the service. Enable advanced connecti on controll ing Your wireless station sends kee p-alive sign als on a periodic basis to an acce ss controller in order to check the validity o f the connection. If the wirele ss station receiv es n o r esponse, the connectio n is ended automatically. If you sel ect t his check box, your wireless station and the access controller can exchange additional s i g n a l s , w h i c h e n a b l e s a q u i c k e r d e t e c t i o n o f l o s t c o n n e c t i o n . GSM prop erties Note: T h e u s e o f G S M h i g h - s p e e d d a t a s e r v i c e s r e q u i r e s t h a t y o u r n e t w o r k supports the HSCSD techn ology and that you have subscribed t o this service. G S M h i g h - s p e e d d a t a s e r v i c e s m a y c o s t m o r e t h a n n o r m a l G S M d a t a services. Contact your service provider for more information. R e m e m b e r t o s e l e c t t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 a s t h e m o d e m i n e a c h d a t a a n d f a x communicati ons application. Note that the modem sett ings have to be separ ately changed in each application. Use GSM connecti on with this profile Select this check box if you want to use the profile for making data calls. When you have an active data call, you can access the Internet an d send and receive e- mail, for example. GSM conne ction method Select the appropriate data call type. Select Analog if you are using a modem c o n n e c t i o n . I f y o u a r e u s i n g a I S D N c o n n e c t i o n , s e l e c t IS DN V .110 o r ISDN V.120 , depending on whi ch ISDN standard your service provider supports. Con tact your servic e prov ider for more info rmat ion on which rem ote ISDN connecti ons a re supported. GSM conne ction speed Select the data tr ansmission speed. The num ber of timesl ots used is indicated in parenthesis and the receiving transm ission rate is mentioned first . 9.6 KBI T/S (1 1) T h e s t a n d a r d G S M d a t a t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e . S e l e c t t h i s o p t i o n i f the network you are using does not support HSCSD technolog y, or yo u have problems wit h making a data call.
Nokia D211 f eatures 31 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. HSCSD techno logy allows for the use of multiple timeslots d uring a data connection. Data transfer is symmetric when the sending a nd receiving t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e s a r e t h e s a m e , f o r e x a m p l e 2 t i m e s l o t s 2 t i m e s l o t s . S y m m e t r i c d a t a t r a n s f e r i s i d e a l f o r w o r k i n g w i t h e - m a i l . D a t a t r a n s f e r i s a s y m m e t r i c w h e n t h e r e c e i v i n g t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e i s h i g h e r t h a n t h e s e n d i n g t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e , f o r example 3 timeslots 1 timeslot. This is ideal for downloading Web pages or files. Due t o the natur e of the netw ork, dat a transm issio n rates may change du ring a data c onnection. You can see the recei ving and sending data t ransmission rate s on the Profil es page under the Operating informatio n a r e a . Dial-up connectio n S e l e c t a d i a l - u p c o n n e c t i o n f r o m t h e l i s t o r c r e a t e a n e w d i a l - u p c o n n e c t i o n u s i n g the Windows d ial-up wizard. D ial-up networking connects you to remote networks using your radio card as a modem or ISDN adapter. GPRS properties Use GPRS connectio n with this profi le Select this check box if you want to use the profile for sending and receivi ng packet data. Use access point provid ed by network Select this if you want the network to select a GPRS acces s poi nt for you. The network will connect you to an available G PRS access p oint autom atically if this feature is suppor ted by the network . 14.4 KBIT/S (1 1) Can be used if it is supported by the network. Do not u se this option un less you are sure your network supports it. 19.2 KBIT/S (2 2) Doubles the standard 9.6 kbit/s GSM da ta transmission rate. Y ou can select this option if your network supports HSCSD technology and you have subsc ribed to GSM high-speed d ata services. 28.8 KBIT/S (2 2) T r i p l e s t h e 9 . 6 k b i t / s t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e , o r d o u b l e s t h e 1 4 . 4 k b i t / s t r a n s m i s s i o n r a t e . T h i s o p t i o n i s i d e a l f o r w o r k i n g with e-mail. Y ou can select this option if your network supports HSCSD technology and you have subsc ribed to GSM high-speed d ata services. 43.2 KBIT/S (3 1) Triples the 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate. This option is ideal for downloading W eb pages since th e radio card receive s data faster than it sends data. Y ou can select this option if your network supports HSCSD technology and you have subsc ribed to GSM high-speed d ata services.
Nokia D211 f eatures 32 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Specify access point name ma nually If you obtain the GPRS access poin t name from your ser vice provider or network operator, select this check box and type the name. An access point name is nee ded t o e s t a b l i s h a c o n n e c t i o n t o a G P R S n e t w o r k . Remo ving p rofi les On the Profile s page, select the Modify tab a nd then select a profile from t he list. Click Delete . The Easy con nection p r o f i l e c a n n o t b e d e l e t e d . Profiles that are store d on a SIM card c an on ly be removed by the system administ rator. Importi ng and exporti ng profi les On the Profiles p a g e , s e l e c t t h e Modify t ab an d the n cli ck Impo rt . Sel ec t the folder from which you want to im port a profile. Similarly, you can save a profile in a folder. Click Export , and select the folder where you w ant to save th e prof ile. The Easy con nection p r o f i l e c a n n o t b e e x p o r t e d . The system adminis trator can impor t profil es from and export profiles to a SIM card. Send ing a pr ofil e a s a t ext messag e Make sure you have either a GSM or GPRS connection type selected. You cann ot s e n d o r r e c e i v e t e x t m e s s a g e s w h e n c o n n e c t e d t o a W L A N . The Easy con nection p r o f i l e c a n n o t b e s e n t a s a t e x t m e s s a g e . 1 On the Profiles page, selec t the Modify t a b a n d s e l e c t t h e p r o f i l e y o u w a n t t o send as a text message. Click Send . 2 The S e n d P r o f i l e V i a S M S dialog box opens. Type the phone num ber of the recipient in the box or click Se lect a n d s e l e c t i t f r o m t h e l i s t o f c o n t a c t s s t o r e d on y our SIM card. The dial-up connect ion that has been specified for t he profile is sent automatically with the profile. Dial-up connections are needed when you want t o m a k e a d a t a c a l l ( G S M c o n n e c t i o n ) o r s e n d p a c k e t d a t a ( G P R S c o n n e c t i o n ) . 3 Click Send t o s e n d t h e t e x t m e s s a g e . Note: A profile may be made up of several text messages. Therefore , sending one profile m ay c ost more than sending one te xt m essage.
Nokia D211 f eatures 33 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Settings page On the Settings page you can set properties that are common for all profiles. Thes e settin gs will remain unchanged even when you switch to using another profile or c o n n e c t i o n t y p e . T h e G S M a n d W L A N s e t t i n g s a p p l y t o c o r r e s p o n d i n g c o n n e c t i o n types only. For the changes to take effect, click the Ap ply button. If you have made chan ges t o t h e s e t t i n g s b u t h a v e n o t y e t c l i c k e d Apply a n d w i s h t o r e s t o r e t h e p r e v i o u s settings, click Restore . Gene ral sett ings (Gene ral tab) Manage TCP/IP proper ties togeth er with profil es B y d e f a u l t , T C P / I P s e t t i n g s a r e m a n a g e d a s d e f i n e d i n e a c h p r o f i l e . When the Ma nag e TCP/IP prope rties t ogethe r with profil es c h e c k b o x i s cleared, profiles will be activated without TCP/IP settings. Y ou can change the settings manually in the Control Pane l of your computer. Do not esta bli sh netw ork conn ect ion a uto ma tical ly When this check box is selected, the Select Connecti on dialog box opens automa tically w hen you star t your c ompute r o r in sert the radio card . In the dialog b o x y o u c a n s e l e c t t h e c o n n e c t i o n t y p e y o u w a n t t o u s e . T h e d e f a u l t c o n n e c t i o n type is Off . See Figure 5 on page 2 0. If you clear t his check bo x, every time you start your co mputer or insert the radio card, the connection that was last used is established automatically. Warning: It is recommende d t hat you have this check b ox s elected. It can prevent you from accidentally establishing a network connection in areas wh ere the use of wire les s device is prohibi ted or w hen it may cause interf erence or danger. Alert when connectio n status c hanges I f t h i s c h e c k b o x i s s e l e c t e d , y o u h e a r a n a l e r t t o n e e v e r y t i m e t h e s t a t u s o f t h e netw ork co nne ction chang es. Open Monitor window automa tically W h e n y o u i n s e r t t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i n t o y o u r c o m p u t e r , a s m a l l i c o n a p p e a r s o n t h e taskbar. By right -clicking this icon a shortcut menu opens, and you can access t he Monitor window from there. If, howe ver, you w ant the Mon itor wi ndow to open a u t o m a t i c a l l y e a c h t i m e t h e c a r d i s i n s e r t e d , s e l e c t t h e Open Monitor w indow automaticall y o p t i o n . Show icon on taskbar I f y o u s e l e c t Show icon on taskbar , a small Nokia D 211 icon will be displayed on the ta skbar when ever th e rad io card is inser ted. If you clear th is ch eck bo x, you can access the u ser i nter face o f the N okia D211 fro m the Start menu (Start, Programs, N o k i a , N o k i a D 2 1 1 ) .
Nokia D211 f eatures 34 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Exit program when card is removed If this check box is selec ted, you automatically exit the program when you remov e the radio card from the wireless station. Basic GSM settings (GSM tab) Automatic ne twork select ion T h e G S M n e t w o r k t o w h i c h y o u r r a d i o c a r d i s c o n n e c t e d c a n b e s e l e c t e d e i t h e r manually or automatically. If the Automatic network selection check box is selected, the radio card automatically sele cts one of the ce llular networ ks available i n your area. Outside of the home network service area, the radio card will se lect one of the ne tworks that have a roam ing agreement w ith the home network. To select a network manually, c lear the Automatic network selection check box and c lick Searc h Networks . S e l e c t a n e t w o r k f r o m t h e l i s t o f a v a i l a b l e n e t w o r k s and click OK . I f t h e r a d i o c a r d c a n n o t r e a c h t h e s e l e c t e d n e t w o r k o r l o s e s c o n t a c t w i t h i t , y o u a r e p r o m p t e d t o s e l e c t a n o t h e r n e t w o r k . Note: If you select any othe r than your home network, this network must h a v e a r o a m i n g a g r e e m e n t w i t h y o u r h o m e n e t w o r k o p e r a t o r . Voice m ailbox numbe r Type your voi ce ma ilbox nu mber in this box. You obtain this numb er fro m your service provider or network ope rator. Displa y cell inf o You can set the radio card to i ndicate w hen it is used in a cellular n etwork base d on Micro Cellular Network ( MCN) technology. Displa y incoming calls When this ch eck box is selected, you will get a not ification when you have a call (data, fax) coming i n. Adva nced G SM setting s (GSM t ab) A number of advanc ed GSM settings are network services : before you can benefit f r o m t h e s e s e r v i c e s , y o u m u s t s u b s c r i b e t o t h e m f r o m y o u r s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r o r network operator and obtain inst ructions on t heir u se. To access these settings, select the Settings page and GSM tab. Click Ad vance d Sett ings . Call Divert Call div erting is a network s ervice that al lows you to direct incoming voice, data and f ax calls to, for e xample, your voice mailbox number.
Nokia D211 f eatures 35 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. To set the call diverts: 1 On the Settin gs page, select the GSM t a b a n d c l i c k Adv anced S ettings . 2 The Advanced GSM Setting s dialog box opens. Select the C all Div ert t a b. 3 From the Call type l i s t , s e l e c t t h e c a l l t y p e y o u w a n t t o b e d i v e r t e d ( v o i c e , data, or fax). 4 Click Ch eck Status to check whether the divert is activated or not. To set the d i v e r t s e t t i n g o n , c l i c k Change . 5 S e l e c t w h e r e y o u w a n t t o d i r e c t y o u r i n c o m i n g c a l l s a n d t y p e t h e p h o n e number . Click OK . 6 Click OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog box. To cancel all the a ctive call diverts at onc e, c lick Cancel All Diverts . To canc el only one call type divert, click Cha nge a nd select Dea ctivate i n t h e Divert to list. Note: Make sure you have either t he GSM or GPRS connection type selected when setting call diverts or ch ecking the stat us. When conn ected to WLAN, you cannot configure the se settings. Call Barring Call barring is a network service that allows you to restric t incoming and outgoing calls so that calls c annot be received or made. Activating call barring or cha nging t he barring settings requires the barring password, which you obtain from your se rvice provider o r networ k operat or. See âÂÂTo change acces s co desâ on page 38 for information on how to change the barring password. To s et call barring options: 1 On the Settin gs page, select the GSM t a b a n d c l i c k Adv anced S ettings . 2 The Advanced GSM Setting s dialog box opens. Select the Call Barring t a b . 3 From the Call type list, selec t the c all type you want to bar (voice, d ata, f ax, or messages). 4 Click Ch eck Status t o a s k t h e n e t w o r k f o r t h e c a l l b a r r i n g s t a t u s . T o s e t a b a r r i n g s e t t i n g o n , c l i c k Activa te . 5 Ty pe your barring password and click OK . 6 Click OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog box. To disable all call barrings, click Cancel All Barring s . To disable only one call type barring, click Deactiva te . Note: Make sure you have either t he GSM or GPRS connection type selected w h e n s e t t i n g c a l l b a r r i n g o p t i o n s o r c h e c k i n g t h e s t a t u s . W h e n c o n n e c t e d t o WLAN, you cann ot conf igure these se ttings.
Nokia D211 f eatures 36 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Messages W i t h t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 y o u c a n s e n d a n d r e c e i v e t e x t a n d p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s . S e e âÂÂNokia Short Messagingâ on pa ge 46 for more information. Any changes th at you make to m essage settings affect the way in which your messages are sent and received. The availability of so me of the settings d epends on the ser vice provider or ne twork operator. SMS application in use S e l e c t t h e S h o r t M e s s a g e S e r v i c e ( S M S ) a p p l i c a t i o n y o u w a n t t o u s e f o r s e n d i n g and r eceiving messages. The Nokia D211 includes the Nokia Short Messaging application. Message centre number You need the message centre number to se nd messages. You receive the number from your s ervice provider or network operator. Messages sent as T e x t a n d p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s a r e n o r m a l l y s e n t i n t e x t f o r m a t , b u t i t i s p o s s i b l e t o convert them into an alternative form at (e-mail, fax, paging). To be able to receive a conve rted message, the recip ient must have an appropriate device available, and the network must supp ort this feature. Mes sage valid ity If the recipient of a mes sage cannot be reached within the set m essage validity p e r i o d , t h e m e s s a g e i s r e m o v e d f r o m t h e m e s s a g e c e n t r e . I f y o u s e l e c t Maximum , the validity period is set to the maximum time allowed by the network. Reply via same message centre Select this check box if you want to request the network to route the reply to your message via yo ur own message centre . Delivery reports Select this c heck box i f you want to receive delivery reports on the mes sages you have sent. Send long messages If the Se nd long messages check box is sele cted, messages longer than 160 characters are sent a s c oncatenated messages. A concatenate d message is received as one long message if the recipientâÂÂs device supports this function. If this o p t i o n i s n o t s e l e c t e d , m e s s a g e s l o n g e r t h a n 1 6 0 c h a r a c t e r s a r e s e n t a s s e v e r a l normal text messages. Start SMS app lication when message is received Select this check box if you want your SMS application, such a s Nokia Short Messaging, to open automatically when you ha ve rec eived a message.
Nokia D211 f eatures 37 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Use G PRS as p referred SMS bearer You can select whether messages will be sent using GPRS packet dat a wheneve r possible. Soun ds I f y o u w a n t t o b e n o t i f i e d o f a n i n c o m i n g c a l l o r m e s s a g e b y a t o n e , s e l e c t t h e Aler t on inc om ing calls and messages c h e c k b o x . T y p e t h e n a m e o f t h e w a v f i l e in the appropri ate text box or click the Browse b u t t o n a n d s e l e c t t h e f i l e y o u w a n t . B y c l i c k i n g t h e a r r o w b u t t o n y o u c a n l i s t e n t o a n e x a m p l e o f t h e s e l e c t e d w a v f i l e . WLAN settings (WLAN tab) E n a b l e p o w e r s a v i n g Since a radio card has no direct w ire connect ion of its own, it uses power from the host computer. The Nokia D211 is equipped with a pow er saving option that allows you to cont rol the p ower consumption of your computer: you can pro long the life of t he battery whe n neede d. I f y o u s e l e c t t h e Enabl e p ower saving check box, the radio card is fully power ed u p o n l y w h e n s e n d i n g o r r e c e i v i n g d a t a . T h e c a r d w a k e s u p f r o m t h e p o w e r s a v i n g m o d e a t r e g u l a r i n t e r v a l s t o c h e c k i f t h e r e i s a n y d a t a f o r i t a t a W L A N a c c e s s point, and wakes up immediately when there is any outgoing data. Note: The speed of communicat ion decreases when the power saving option is u sed. Note: The power saving option may not be c ompatible with WLAN access p o i n t s t h a t a r e n o t W i - F i ( W i r e l e s s F i d e l i t y ) a p p r o v e d . D o n o t u s e p o w e r saving with such access points. Case-sensitive network n ames B y d e f a u l t , t h e n a m e o f t h e W L A N i s c a s e - s e n s i t i v e . I f y o u d o n o t w a n t t h e network names to b e case-se nsitive, clear this check box. Renew DHCP automatically w hen needed I f t h e n e t w o r k h a s a D H C P s e r v e r a n d y o u w a n t t h e s y s t e m t o a l l o c a t e y o u I P addresses automatic ally, select the Renew DHCP a utomati cally when n eeded check box. You can also renew your IP address whenever you want by clicking the Renew DHCP Now button. Secu rity se tti ngs (Secur ity tab) You can set various access codes and protect your radio card and SIM card against unaut horised use . Codes can only include digits from 0 to 9.
Nokia D211 f eatures 38 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. PIN code request The PIN (Pe rsonal Identificati on Numb er) code is usually supplied wit h the SIM c a r d . I t p r o t e c t s y o u r S I M c a r d a g a i n s t u n a u t h o r i z e d u s e . I f y o u s e t t h e PIN code request o n , y o u a r e a s k e d f o r t h e P I N c o d e w h e n y o u s t a r t t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 program or insert the rad io card , provide d that you have inserted a SIM card into the radio card. Click the Change button to chang e the statu s. Note: Some SI M cards do not allow turning off the PIN code re quest. I f y o u e n t e r a n i n c o r r e c t P I N c o d e t h r e e t i m e s i n a r o w , t h e c o d e i s b l o c k e d a n d t h e S I M c a r d c a n n o t b e u s e d . T o c h a n g e a b l o c k e d P I N c o d e , y o u n e e d a P U K ( P I N Unblocking Key) code. PUK is an 8-digit code supplied with the SIM car d. Secu rity code reques t The security code protects your radio card agains t unauthorised use, and is supplied with the radio card. The prese t code is 12345. Change the preset code and k e e p t h e n e w c o d e s e c r e t a n d i n a s a f e p l a c e s e p a r a t e f r o m y o u r r a d i o c a r d . If you key in an incorrect security code five times in succession, the radio card will n o t a c c e p t t h e c o r r e c t c o d e f o r t h e n e x t f i v e m i n u t e s . To c hange access codes: You can change the PIN co de, se curity code, a nd barring password. Note that changing the b arring passw ord re quires that the call barring servi ce i s activated f o r y o u r S I M c a r d . 1 On the Settin gs page, select the Securi ty t a b a n d c l i c k Change Access Code . 2 The Change Acc ess Code dialog box opens. Select f rom the list the access code you want to change . 3 In the Current code b o x , t y p e t h e c o d e u s e d p r e s e n t l y . 4 In the New cod e box, type the new code. Note: T h e a c c e s s c o d e s m a y o n l y i n c l u d e n u m b e r s f r o m 0 t o 9 . T h e P I N c o d e l e n g t h m u s t b e a t l e a s t f o u r a n d n o m o r e t h a n e i g h t d i g i t s . T h e l e n g t h o f t h e s e c u r i t y c o d e i s a l w a y s f i v e d i g i t s a n d t h e l e n g t h o f t h e ba rrin g pas swo rd is four di gi ts. 5 In the Co nfirm ne w code box, type the new co de again. 6 Click OK to apply the changes and to close t he dialog box . T ool s pag e On t he Tools page you f ind, for example, detaile d infor mation on the n etwork c o n n e c t i o n s , y o u c a n r u n a s e r i e s o f f a u l t d i a g n o s i s t e s t s , a n d y o u c a n c r e a t e personal WEP keys.
Nokia D211 f eatures 39 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Sett ing counte rs On the Co unters t a b y o u c a n v i e w d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e d i f f e r e n t t y p e s o f network connec tions made: nu mber of conne ctions, their duration, and a mount o f d a t a t r a n s m i t t e d . Y o u c a n a l s o s e e h o w m a n y t e x t a n d p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s y o u have sen t and receiv ed. Y o u c a n s e l e c t a p r e - d e f i n e d t i m e p e r i o d f o r w h i c h i n f o r m a t i o n i s s h o w n , o r s e t the start and end time yoursel f. Y o u c a n s a v e t h e i n f o r m a t i o n t o a n h t m l o r a c s v f i l e b y c l i c k i n g t h e Report but ton. To cle ar all counters, click Clear . Note: T h e a c t u a l i n v o i c e f o r c a l l s a n d s e r v i c e s f r o m y o u r s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r m a y vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for b illing, taxes and so f orth. View ing histor y i nfo rmat ion On the Histo ry tab you can monitor vari ous connectio n events. You can sele ct the type of net work and the level of detail to be reported. Y o u c a n s a v e t h e i n f o r m a t i o n t o a n h t m l o r a c s v f i l e b y c l i c k i n g t h e Report but ton. N o t e t h a t o n l y i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t i s c u r r e n t l y o n d i s p l a y i s s a v e d t o a f i l e . T h e f i l e can b e use ful if you need, for example, to contact technical support in problem situations. To remov e all history information, c lick Cl ea r . Diag nosi ng faults On the Diagnostics t a b y o u c a n r u n a s e r i e s o f f a u l t d i a g n o s i s t e s t s t o e n s u r e t h a t the radio card and the software are operating correctly. If you encounte r problems i n a c c e s s i n g a n e t w o r k , f o r e x a m p l e , t h e t e s t s c a n h e l p t o i d e n t i f y t h e s o u r c e o f the problem. The tests check that the software files h ave not been modified, the settin gs conf igur ed both on the Prof iles a n d Settings p a g e s a r e v a l i d a n d d o n o t c o n f l i c t , and all drivers have been installed corre ctly. If the ca rd does not pass the test, you are given advi ce on how to pr oceed. T o s t a r t t h e f a u l t d i a g n o s i s t e s t , c l i c k Start . Y o u c a n s a v e t h e t e s t r e s u l t t o a t e x t f i l e b y c l i c k i n g t h e Report but ton. The te xt file can be useful if you need, for example, to contact tec hnical suppor t in problem situations. Note that the content of this file is in English only. Mana ging p erso nal WE P keys Personal Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) keys are used for authentic ating the user in a WLAN. Personal keys are usually created by the system administrator, who can store them on SIM cards and then distribut e them t o the users. Personal keys can a l s o b e s a v e d t o a f i l e . S i n c e p e r s o n a l k e y s a r e n o t n e t w o r k s p e c i f i c , t h e y c a n n o t b e
Nokia D211 f eatures 40 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. saved together with prof iles. They can, h owever, be saved to a file and used independently from profiles. Personal WEP keys can be used only wit h the infrastruct ure operat ing mode , provided that t he WLAN access point s upports the ke ys. Ad hoc networks use s h a r e d W E P k e y s o n l y . See âÂÂCreating and editing personal WEP keysâ on page 4 4 for more information. Administrator p age The Administrat or page is meant for system administrators and is not installed as part of the normal in stallation procedure. On the Administrato r p age, the syst em a d m i n i s t r a t o r c a n v i e w d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e n e t w o r k c o n n e c t i o n s a n d s a v e important data on a SIM card. The administrato r can create installation disks that include relevant network profiles a nd settings, and that then can be distributed to end users within a corpo ration, for ex ample. Monitor ing informa tion on W LAN On the WLAN t a b y o u c a n v i e w g e n e r a l i n f o r m a t i o n o n v a r i o u s e l e m e n t s o f a W L A N . D e p e n d i n g o n t h e t y p e o f a c c e s s p o i n t i n u s e , t h e d e t a i l s d i s p l a y e d c a n include net work na me, data r ate, channel, signal strength, and IP addres s. Select f rom the following it ems: Access points â In the infrastructure operating mode, shows which WLAN ac cess p o i n t s a r e c u r r e n t l y i n r a n g e a n d a v a i l a b l e . Networ ks â Sh ows all the wirele ss local area netwo rks that can be access ed with the radio card. Wireless stations â I n t h e a d h o c o p e r a t i n g m o d e , t h e n a m e s o f t h e o t h e r computer s connect ed to t he a d hoc network are displaye d. Not e that only the names of those compute rs that are using the Nokia D211 are shown. T o u p d a t e t h e i n f o r m a t i o n o n d i s p l a y , c l i c k Refresh . Viewin g WLAN statisti cs On the Statistics t a b y o u c a n v i e w d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e c o n n e c t i o n between the Nokia D211and the WLAN access point to which you are linked. Both graphical and numeric statistics are given for the following properties: c onnection quality, received signal s trength (RSSI), noise f loor, signal to noise ratio (S NR), Tx retry rate, and data flow. I f y o u w a n t t o s a v e t h e i n f o r m a t i o n t o a t e x t f i l e , c l i c k Sta rt Logging .
Nokia D211 f eatures 41 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Crea ting i nsta llat ion disks The system administr ator can create installation disks that contain all the s o f t w a r e a n d n e c e s s a r y s e t t i n g s n e e d e d f o r a c c e s s i n g n e t w o r k s . T h e c u s t o m installation package fits on a compact disk but can also be saved on a hard disk. The installation disk can be used for distributing profiles. All the desire d settings and profiles can be copied to the installation disk, and the end user does not have t o c o n f i g u r e s e t t i n g s i n o r d e r t o b e a b l e t o c o n n e c t t o a n e t w o r k . To g enerate an installation disk: 1 On the Ad ministrator page, se lect the Insta lla tio n Disk t a b. S e l e c t f r o m t h e following options: Profiles available â T h e l i s t c o n t a i n s t h e n a m e s o f a l l t h e p r o f i l e s f o u n d i n t h e system reg istry. Sele ct th e prof iles tha t you want to i nclude i n the installatio n package. Allow editing o f selected profiles â The administrator can deny the editing of those profiles that are distributed with the installation disk. The u ser can creat e new profi le s. Include smart card dr iver â If you want other applications to be able to use the smart card reader of t he Nokia D211, you need t o install a PC/SC (Personal C o m p u t e r S m a r t C a r d ) c o m p l i a n t s m a r t c a r d d r i v e r . W h e n t h i s o p t i o n i s s e l e c t e d , t h e s m a r t c a r d r e a d e r c a n b e u s e d w i t h o t h e r a p p l i c a t i o n s b e s i d e s t h e Nokia D2 1 1, and with special types of smart car ds. Include basic setti ngs from Settings pa ge â C e r t a i n s e t t i n g s t h a t h a v e b e e n configur ed on the Settings p a g e c a n b e i n c l u d e d i n t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p a c k a g e . These include all settings configured on the Gen eral t ab , GSM tab (no advanced settings s uch as call diverts), and WLAN tab . Th ese settings a re c o m m o n f o r a l l p r o f i l e s . Create one file installation pa ckage â T h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p a c k a g e c o n s i s t s o f o n l y one executabl e file. I t co ntains the necessary files and drivers, a nd is easier to d i s t r i b u t e t h r o u g h e - m a i l , f o r e x a m p l e , t h a n s e v e r a l s e p a r a t e f i l e s . Include Administrator page â T h e e n t i r e Administrato r page is included in the installation package. 2 To start creating an installation d isk wit h the selected profiles and option s, click Create . 3 Select the destination folder and click OK . Mana ging S IM card c ont ents T h e s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r c a n s t o r e i m p o r t a n t i n f o r m a t i o n s u c h a s p e r s o n a l W E P k e y s a n d n e t w o r k p r o f i l e s o n a S I M c a r d . T h e a d m i n i s t r a t o r c a n t h e n g i v e u s e r s S I M c a r d s , w h i c h c o n t a i n t h e n e c e s s a r y n e t w o r k s e t t i n g s a n d e n c r y p t i o n k e y s f o r quick network access.
Nokia D211 f eatures 42 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Transfe rring files from the comp uter to the SIM ca rd an d vice versa is done by using a drag-and-drop operation or by using the Copy , Move , and Delete b utto ns on the SIM Card t a b . For the changes to take effect, click Appl y . Note that the butto n is inactiv e if the re i s n o t e n o u g h f r e e s p a c e o n t h e S I M c a r d . I f y o u h a v e m a d e c h a n g e s b u t w i s h t o resto re the previ ous state , click Restore . Dist ribu ting p rofi les The system adm inistrator can create profiles and then distribute them to end users w i t h i n a c o r p o r a t i o n . T h e r e a r e d i f f e r e n t w a y s f o r d e l i v e r i n g p r o f i l e s : ⢠Installation disks: the system administrator can create installation disks which con tain a ll th e s oft ware and nec ess ary s etti ngs neede d f or a cce ssing net wor ks â in cluding profiles. See âÂÂCreating installation disksâ on page 4 1. ⢠N e t w o r k : p r o f i l e s c a n b e s a v e d t o a f o l d e r o n a n e t w o r k d r i v e f r o m w h i c h t h e end user can import the profile . See âÂÂImport ing and exp orting profilesâ on page 32. ⢠S I M c a r d : t h e s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r c a n s t o r e p r o f i l e s o n S I M c a r d s w h i c h c a n then be dist ributed to e nd users. S ee âÂÂManagin g SIM card contentsâ above. ⢠T e x t m e s s a g e s : p r o f i l e s c a n b e d i s t r i b u t e d b y s e n d i n g a t e x t m e s s a g e t h a t i n c l u d e s a p r o f i l e . S e e â S e n d i n g a p r o f i l e a s a t e x t m e s s a g e â o n p a g e 3 2 . WEP security To in crease the security of communication over the wirele ss local area n etwork, the Nokia D211 o ffers the Wired Equiv alent Privacy (WEP) securit y feature. WEP u s e s t h e R C 4 a l g o r i t h m w i t h a n u p t o 1 5 2 - b i t k e y . T h e a l g o r i t h m p r o v i d e s f o r s e c u r i t y v i a t w o m e t h o d s : a u t h e n t i c a t i o n a n d e n c r y p t i o n . A u t h e n t i c a t i o n i s t h e means b y which one w ireless station is verified to have authorisation to c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h a s e c o n d s t a t i o n i n a g i v e n c o v e r a g e a r e a . In the inf rastructure operating mode, authentication is e stablished between a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t a n d e a c h w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n . I f a w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n r e c e i v e s a p a c k e t t h a t h a s n o t b e e n s c r a m b l e d w i t h a c o r r e c t k e y , t h e p a c k e t i s d i s c a r d e d . Encrypted messages can b e op ened b y othe r radi o cards onl y if they all u se the same encryption key. I n the ad hoc operating mode, authentication is establishe d betwe en each wireless station. T h e l e v e l o f s e c u r i t y i s d e p e n d e n t o n t h e l e n g t h o f t h e k e y : t h e m o r e b i t s t h e r e a r e i n t h e k e y , t h e l o n g e r i t t a k e s t o d e c r y p t t h e i n f o r m a t i o n s e n t a n d t h e h i g h e r t h e level of security. WEP ke ys consis t of a secr et key and a 24-bit Initialization Vector. For ex ample, t h e 1 2 8 - b i t W E P k e y h a s a 1 0 4 - b i t s e c r e t k e y t h a t t h e u s e r c a n s e t , a n d a 2 4 - b i t Initialization Vect or that cannot be cont rolled by t he u ser. Many manufact urers
Nokia D211 f eatures 43 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. r e f e r t o t h i s 1 2 8 - b i t k e y a s a 1 2 8 - b i t k e y , w h e r e a s s o m e r e f e r t o i t a s a 1 0 4 - b i t k e y ( 1 0 4 2 4 ) . B o t h k e y s o f f e r t h e s a m e l e v e l o f e n c r y p t i o n a n d a r e t h e r e f o r e interoperable . Tip: R e g a r d l e s s o f h o w t h e W E P k e y s h a v e b e e n n a m e d , a l l k e y s a r e compatible as long as their length is the same. For example, keys that are 40 b i t s l o n g , a l w a y s c o n s i s t o f 5 a l p h a n u m e r i c c h a r a c t e r s o r 1 0 h e x a d e c i m a l characters. The Nokia D2 11 su pports three key le ngths: 40 (40 24), 128 (1 04 24), and 15 2 ( 1 2 8 2 4 ) b i t s . T h e 4 0 - b i t k e y i s W i - F i ( W i r e l e s s F i d e l i t y ) c o m p a t i b l e . There are t wo types of WEP ke ys: shared keys a n d person al keys . Shared W EP key s Shared WEP keys are shared by all wireless stations using the net work or s u b n e t w o r k ; o n l y s t a t i o n s t h a t h a v e t h e c o r r e c t k e y c a n r e c e i v e a n d d e c r y p t d a t a . T h e s a m e k e y i s l o a d e d i n t o t h e W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t . S h a r e d k e y s a r e u s u a l l y crea ted by system admin ist rato rs, who dist ribu te the m to user s. Shared keys are ne twork-specific, an d e ach networ k can have a ma ximum of four d i f f e r e n t s h a r e d k e y s . A W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t o n l y t r a n s m i t s d a t a u s i n g t h e a c t i v e k e y , b u t c a n r e c e i v e d a t a f r o m w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s u s i n g a n y o f t h e f o u r s h a r e d WEP ke ys. Tip: I f y o u h a v e a p r o f i l e t h a t i n c l u d e s m o r e t h a n o n e n e t w o r k , i t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t y o u u s e t h e s a m e s h a r e d W E P k e y s w i t h a l l t h e s e networks . Because t he shared WEP k eys are network-speci fic and user-indepen dent, they c a n b e s a v e d i n a f i l e t o g e t h e r w i t h p r o f i l e s . U s e r s c a n i m p o r t f r o m a f i l e o r a S I M c a r d p r o f i l e s t h a t i n c l u d e s h a r e d k e y s a n d t h a t h a v e b e e n c r e a t e d b y t h e i r s y s t e m administ rator. Shared keys can be used as the only form of WEP sec urity or used together with a personal key. P e r s o n a l W E P k e y s Each wireless station can have a n individual, personal WE P key. Personal keys are u s e d f o r p r o v i d i n g a d d i t i o n a l s e c u r i t y f o r w i r e l e s s c o n n e c t i o n s . T h e y a r e u s u a l l y crea ted by system admin ist ra tors, who dis tri bute them to u ser s. A WL AN acce ss point uses a different key for e ach wireless station. There a re two types of pers onal WEP keys, and the difference betwe en the keys is t h e t y p e o f i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t i s u s e d f o r i d e n t i f y i n g t h e u s e r : ⢠Station-specif ic â U s e s t h e M A C a d d r e s s o f t h e r a d i o c a r d t o i d e n t i f y t h e u s e r. ⢠User-specific â U ses an identi fier t ha t the users can creat e themsel ves. U n l i k e s h a r e d W E P k e y s , p e r s o n a l W E P k e y s a r e n o t n e t w o r k s p e c i f i c , a n d theref ore cann ot be saved toget her with profile s. They can , howe ver, be sav ed t o a file and u sed independently fro m profile s.
Nokia D211 f eatures 44 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Personal WEP keys can be used only wit h the infrastruct ure operat ing mode . Ad hoc networks use shared WEP keys only. Note: Not all WLAN access points support pers onal WEP keys. A sk your system administrator for m ore information. C r e a t i n g a n d e d i t i n g s h a r e d W E P k e y s Shared WEP keys are u sually created by a sy stem administrator. I n t h e i n f r a s t r u c t u r e o p e r a t i n g m o d e , m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e s a m e s h a r e d W E P k e y i s configured to the WLAN access point; if the access point and radio card are using incompatible keys, they cannot communicate. Contact your system administrator for details. 1 On the Pro files page, select the Modify tab. Select from the list the profile w i t h w h i c h y o u w a n t t o u s e a s h a r e d W E P k e y . C l i c k Ed it . 2 The Edit Profile dialog box opens. Select WLAN a n d Ge neral t a b . 3 Select the Use WEP securi ty c h e c k b o x a n d c l i c k WEP Keys . 4 Select from the four keys which one you want t o modify. C lick Ed it . 5 Select the appropr iate key leng th. Supported key lengths are 40, 128, a nd 152 bits. Re mem ber that the more bits there are in the key , the higher the level of s ecurity. T y p e i n t h e W E P k e y d a t a i n h e x a d e c i m a l f o r m a t . I f y o u w a n t t o e n t e r t h e W E P k e y i n t e x t f o r m , t y p e t h e t e x t i n t h e In text form box. You can copy and paste the t ext by using the CTRL C and CTRL V key com binations respectivel y. 6 Click OK t o s a v e t h e s h a r e d W E P k e y . To select w hich shared WEP key to use, select the key and click Activat e . T o e m p t y t h e c o n t e n t s o f t h e k e y , c l i c k Clear . Crea ting and edi ting per sona l WE P ke ys Personal WEP keys can be used only wit h the infrastruct ure operat ing mode . Ad hoc networks use shared WEP keys only. M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e s a m e p e r s o n a l W E P k e y i s c o n f i g u r e d t o t h e W L A N a c c e s s point; if the access point a nd radio card are using incompatible keys, they cannot communicate with each othe r . Contact your s ystem administrator for d etails. 1 Go to the Tools page and select the Per sonal K eys tab . Click Ne w t o c r e a t e a new key , or click Edit to modif y an existing one. 2 G i v e t h e p e r s o n a l k e y a n a m e . Y o u c a n a l s o i n c l u d e a f u r t h e r d e s c r i p t i o n o f t h e k e y, s u c h a s t h e n a m e o f t h e n e t w o r k w h e r e t h e k e y i s u s e d . 3 S e l e c t t h e t y p e o f k e y y o u w a n t t o c r e a t e : stati on-specific or user- spe cifi c . If you choose a station-specific key , the MAC address of the r adio card is used for identifyin g the user . I f you choose a user -specific key , you can cho ose the iden tifi er your sel f.
Nokia D211 f eatures 45 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. 4 Select the appropr iate key leng th. Supported key lengths are 40, 128, a nd 152 b i t s . R e m e m b e r t h a t t h e m o r e b i t s t h e r e a r e i n t h e k e y, t h e h i g h e r t h e l e v e l o f security . Click Generate . The system gen erates your perso nal k ey. I f y o u w a n t t o e n t e r t h e W E P k e y i n t e x t f o r m , t y p e t h e t e x t i n t h e In text form b o x . Y o u c a n c o p y a n d p a s t e t h e t e x t b y u s i n g t h e C T R L C a n d C T R L V k e y combinations respectively. 5 Click OK t o s a v e t h e W E P k e y . Importi ng and exporti ng perso nal WEP keys Instead of creat ing a personal WEP key yourself, you can import from a folder a key c r e a t e d , f o r e x a m p l e , b y y o u r s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r . Y o u c a n e x p o r t a n d s a v e personal keys in folder s. T he system administrator can import personal WEP ke ys from a SIM card and export them to a SIM card. 1 On the Tools page, select the Pe rsonal K eys t a b . S e l e c t t h e k e y y o u w a n t t o save t o a file and click Export . T o open a key from a file, click Import . 2 I f y o u a r e e x p o r t i n g a p e r s o n a l W E P k e y, s e l e c t t h e d e s t i n a t i o n t o w h i c h y o u w a n t t o s a v e t h e k e y, a n d c l i c k Save. I f y o u a r e i m p o r t i n g a k e y, s e l e c t t h e source from w hich you want to import the key and click Open . Sele ctin g a p erso nal WE P ke y 1 On the Pro files page, select the Modify tab. Select from the list the profile w i t h w h i c h y o u w a n t t o u s e a p e r s o n a l W E P k e y . C l i c k Edit . 2 The Edit Profile dialog box opens. Select WLAN a n d Ge neral t a b . 3 Select the Use WEP securi ty c h e c k b o x a n d c l i c k WEP Keys . 4 Select the Use a personal WEP key c h e c k b o x a n d s e l e c t a k e y f r o m t h e l i s t . 5 Click OK .
Nokia Short Messaging 46 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Nokia Short Messaging The Nokia Sh ort Messaging application enables you to manage text and picture messages in a similar way that you manage e-m ail: you can send and receive m e s s a g e s , r e p l y t o a m e s s a g e , a n d f o r w a r d a m e s s a g e . The sending and receiving o f mess ages req uires that the Short Message Service (SMS) is availa ble in the GS M network you are using and it i s activated for your SIM card. Contact your service provider or network oper ator for details . Note: You cann ot se nd or receive messages when con nected to a WLAN. Tip: Yo u ca n ac ces s th e Nok ia Short M essa gin g app lic ation by rig ht-c lick ing t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 i c o n o n t h e t a s k b a r a n d b y s e l e c t i n g SMS ap plication from the shortcut menu. If the ta skbar icon is not visible, see page 33 for more information. The Nokia Sho rt Messagin g application consists of the fol lowing page s: ⢠The Inbo x p a g e c o n t a i n s t h e r e c e i v e d m e s s a g e s . R e c e i v e d t e x t m e s s a g e . I f t h e m e s s a g e i c o n i s g r e e n , y o u h a v e n o t r e a d the messa ge. Received pi cture message. M e s s a g e t h a t y o u h a v e f o r w a r d e d t o s o m e o n e . M e s s a g e t o w h i c h y o u h a v e r e p l i e d . Yo u h a v e b o t h r e p l i e d t o t h e m e s s a g e a n d f o r w a r d e d i t t o s o m e o n e . Received business card. ⢠The Outbox p a g e c o n t a i n s m e s s a g e s t h a t a r e b e i n g s e n t o r w a i t i n g t o b e s e n t . If you write and send a new message when the radio card is not inserted in the w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n , y o u a r e c o n n e c t e d t o W L A N , o r t h e G S M o r G P R S c o n n e c t i o n i s l o s t , t h e u n s e n t m e s s a g e i s s t o r e d i n O u t b o x . O u t b o x m a y c o n t a i n s e v e r a l unsent messa ges, which are the n s ent when the rad io ca rd is insert ed, or a proper network connection is established. The messages can have the following statuses: Sending â The message is c urrently being sent. Waiting â T h e m e s s a g e i s w a i t i n g f o r s e n d i n g t o b e c o m e p o s s i b l e . ⢠The Delivery reports page cont ains inf ormation on the status of the message s y o u h a v e s e n t . T h i s i s a n e t w o r k s e r v i c e t o w h i c h y o u m u s t s u b s c r i b e b e f o r e being able to use it.
Nokia Short Messaging 47 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. P oss ibl e status es for sent messag es are: Deli vered â T h e m e s s a g e h a s b e e n d e l i v e r e d t o t h e r e c i p i e n t . Pending â T h e m e s s a g e h a s n o t b e e n d e l i v e r e d t o t h e r e c i p i e n t y e t . I f t h e recipient of a message cannot be reached w ithin the set message validity period, the message is removed from the message centre. Failed â The message could not be deliv ered to the recipien t. The recipient was not reached wit hin t he set mess age vali dity pe riod and the message was removed from the message centre. ⢠The Sent messages page contains a copy of each sent message. ⢠The Conta cts page ena bles you t o m anage contact information an d bu siness cards stored on the SIM card. Y ou can create, edit, and dele te contact s, and send business cards as text messages. T ext messages B e f o r e y o u c a n s e n d a n y t e x t m e s s a g e s , y o u n e e d t o s a v e y o u r m e s s a g e c e n t r e number. See âÂÂConfiguring message settingsâ on page 4 8 for more information. Make sure you have either a GSM or GPRS connection type selected. You cann ot send or re ceive messages w hen conne cted to WLAN. Send ing text messa ges 1 Click on the toolb ar , or cli ck New o n t h e File menu. The Message Editor dialog box open s. 2 In the Message fi eld, ty pe the message. The character counter above the f ield s h o w s h o w m a n y c h a r a c t e r s y o u h a v e l e f t a n d i n h o w m a n y m e s s a g e s t h e t e x t will be sent. Note: T h e s t a n d a r d l e n g t h o f a t e x t m e s s a g e i s 1 6 0 c h a r a c t e r s . M e s s a g e s l o n g e r t h a n t h i s c a n b e s e n t a s s e v e r a l n o r m a l t e x t m e s s a g e s o r a s o n e c o n c a t e n a t e d t e x t m e s s a g e w h i c h i s r e c e i v e d a s o n e l o n g m e s s a g e i f t h e r e c i p i e n t ' s d e v i c e s u p p o r t s t h i s f u n c t i o n . Y o u c a n s e l e c t t h e Send l ong mess age s o ption on the Se ttings p a g e o f t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 . S e e âÂÂConfiguri ng message settings â on page 48 for more informa tion. Y o u c a n a t t a c h a p i c t u r e t o t h e t e x t m e s s a g e . S e e â S e n d i n g p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s â on page 49 for more in formation. 3 Click the A d d R e c i p i e n t s button. Select the recipient from the list of contacts on t he le ft and click the arrow button p ointing to t he right. If you do n ot have a cont act card cr eated for the recipien t, type the phone num ber in the Number box and click the a rrow button. Note that y ou c an send the message t o s e v e r a l r e c i p i e n t s . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e r e c i p i e n t s , c l i c k OK . 4 T o s e n d t h e m e s s a g e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r.
Nokia Short Messaging 48 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Replyin g to text messa ges 1 On the Inbox page, select the m essage to whic h you want to rep ly. 2 Click o n the toolbar , or click Reply o n t h e File m e n u . T h e Messag e Editor dialog box open s. 3 In the Message field, type your reply. 4 T o s e n d t h e m e s s a g e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r. Forw ardi ng text m ess ages 1 On the Inbox p a g e , s e l e c t t h e m e s s a g e y o u w a n t t o f o r w a r d . T o f o r w a r d a message you have sent to so meone, go to the Sent messag es page and select the message. 2 Click on the toolbar , or click Forward o n t h e File m e n u . T h e Message Edit or dialog box ope ns. 3 Click the A d d R e c i p i e n t s button. Select the recipient from the list of contacts on t he le ft and click the arrow button p ointing to t he right. If you do n ot have a cont act card cr eated for the recipien t, type the phone num ber in the Number box and click the a rrow button. Note that y ou c an send the message t o s e v e r a l r e c i p i e n t s . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e r e c i p i e n t s , c l i c k OK . 4 T o s e n d t h e m e s s a g e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r. Deletin g text message s and deliver y report s To del ete a text message 1 On the In box pa ge, sele ct the m essa ge you wa nt to de lete. To dele te an uns ent message, go to the Outbox p a g e , a n d t o d e l e t e a s e n t m e s s a g e , g o t o t h e Sent mes sage s p a g e . 2 Click o n the toolbar , or click De lete o n t h e File m enu. T o delet e a ll messages, click Delet e All o n t h e File m e n u . To d elete delivery reports: 1 On the De livery reports page, select the delive ry repor t you want to delete . 2 Click on the t oolbar , or click De lete o n t h e File menu. By clicking t he Clea r List button you can delete the whole list of reports. Conf igur ing me ssa ge setting s 1 On the Tools menu, click Nokia D211 . The Manager window of the Nokia D2 1 1 opens. 2 Go to the Settin gs p a g e a n d s e l e c t t h e GSM tab . Click Advanced Sett ings . 3 The Advance d GSM S ett ing s dialog box opens. Sel ect the Mess ages t a b .
Nokia Short Messaging 49 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. 4 Make the nec essary changes. See âÂÂMess agesâ o n page 3 6 for more information. 5 When you have con figur ed the nec essar y settin gs, clic k OK . Picture messag es You can send and receive text messages that contain pictures. These mess ages are called picture messages. Note t hat: ⢠This function can be used only if it is support ed by your network operator or service provider. Only devi ces t hat offer pi cture me ssage fea tures can receiv e and di splay pi cture messages. ⢠E a c h p i c t u r e m e s s a g e i s m a d e u p o f t h r e e t e x t m e s s a g e s . T h e r e f o r e , s e n d i n g one picture message may cost more than sendin g on e text message . ⢠Before you can sen d any picture messages, you need to save your message centre number . See âÂÂConfiguring message se ttingsâ on page 48 for more information. ⢠Make sure you have either a GSM or GPRS connec tion type se lected. Y ou cannot send or receiv e m essages when connected to WLAN. Send ing pictur e messages 1 Click on the toolb ar , or cli ck New o n t h e File menu. The Message Editor dialog box open s. 2 T o i n s e r t a p i c t u r e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r. T h e Pictur e Library dialog box opens. 3 S e l e c t t h e p i c t u r e y o u w a n t t o a t t a c h t o t h e m e s s a g e a n d c l i c k OK . I f t h e r e a r e n o p i c t u r e s a v a i l a b l e i n t h e l i s t , c l i c k t o d r a w a n e w p i c t u r e o r import a picture from a file by clicking . See âÂÂDrawing and editing picturesâ on p age 50 and âÂÂOpenin g pictur es fro m a fileâ on page 5 0 for more information. 4 In the Message fi eld, ty pe the message. The character counter above the f ield s h o w s h o w m a n y c h a r a c t e r s y o u h a v e l e f t a n d i n h o w m a n y m e s s a g e s t h e t e x t will be sent. 5 Click the A d d R e c i p i e n t s button. Select the recipient from the list of contacts on t he le ft and click the arrow button p ointing to t he right. If you do n ot have a cont act card cr eated for the recipien t, type the phone num ber in the Number box and click the a rrow button. Note that y ou c an send the message t o s e v e r a l r e c i p i e n t s . W h e n y o u h a v e s e l e c t e d t h e r e c i p i e n t s , c l i c k OK . 6 T o s e n d t h e m e s s a g e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r.
Nokia Short Messaging 50 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Draw ing and e dit ing pictur es 1 On the Tools menu, clic k Pict ure Library . 2 T o d r a w a n e w p i c t u r e , c l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r. T o e d i t a p i c t u r e , s e l e c t t h e picture and click on t he toolbar . The Picture Edito r dialog box opens . 3 M o v e t h e m o u s e c u r s o r t o t h e d e s i r e d p o s i t i o n . T h e c u r s o r a p p e a r s a s a p e n o n the drawing area. Press down the left mouse button. Move the mouse to draw . The left m ouse button draws black colo ur , and the right mouse button draws w h i t e c o l o u r. T o s t o p d r a w i n g , r e l e a s e t h e m o u s e b u t t o n . C l i c k Sav e t o s a v e the picture. 4 Click Close to close the Pictur e Library dialo g box. S a v i n g p i c t u r e s t o a f i l e 1 On the Tools menu, clic k Pict ure Library . 2 S e l e c t t h e p i c t u r e y o u w a n t t o s a v e t o a f i l e . C l i c k o n t h e t o o l b a r. 3 In the Export Picture dialog box , type a nam e for the file. By de fault, pictures a r e s a v e d a s p i c t u r e m e s s a g e f i l e s i n g m s f o r m a t . C l i c k Save . 4 Click Close to close the Pictur e Library dialo g box. If you have received a picture message, you can add the picture to the Pi cture Library by cl icki ng Save P ictu re o n t h e File m e n u . Open ing pictur es from a fil e 1 On the Tools menu, clic k Pict ure Library . 2 Click on the toolbar . 3 In the Import Picture d ialog box, select or ty pe the name of the file you want t o i m p o r t t o t h e P i c t u r e L i b r a r y . C l i c k Open . 4 Click Close to close the Pictur e Library dialo g box. Dele ting p ictu res 1 On the Tools menu, clic k Pict ure Library . 2 Select the picture you want to re move and click on the toolbar . 3 Click Close to close the Pictur e Library dialo g box. Contacts C o n t a c t s a r e n a m e s a n d p h o n e n u m b e r s t h a t h a v e b e e n s a v e d i n t h e S I M c a r d â s memory .
Nokia Short Messaging 51 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Crea ting a nd editing co nta cts 1 On the Co ntacts p a g e , c l i c k New t o c r e a t e a n e w c o n t a c t . T o e d i t a c o n t a c t , click Edit . The C o n t a c t Inf orm atio n dialog opens. 2 Ty pe th e name and phone numbe r for the contact. Click OK . I f y o u r e c e i v e a m e s s a g e f r o m a p h o n e n u m b e r t h a t i s n o t s t o r e d o n y o u r S I M c a r d , you can save the number to the list of contacts by clicking Add To Contacts o n t h e File m e n u . Dele ting c onta cts 1 On the Co ntacts page, select the contac t you want to delete. 2 Click o n the toolbar , or click De lete . Send ing busine ss cards W h e n y o u s e n d o r r e c e i v e a p e r s o n â s c o n t a c t i n f o r m a t i o n , t h e t e r m business card i s u s e d . A b u s i n e s s c a r d i s a c o n t a c t c a r d i n a f o r m a t s u i t a b l e f o r t r a n s m i s s i o n , such as vCard format. 1 On the Contacts p a g e , s e l e c t t h e c o n t a c t y o u w a n t t o s e n d a s a b u s i n e s s c a r d . Click Send . 2 The Send Busines s Card dialog box opens. T ype the p hone number of the recipient, or click Selec t t o s e l e c t t h e r e c i p i e n t f r o m t h e l i s t o f c o n t a c t s . 3 Click Send to send the business card. Make sure you have either a GSM or GPRS connection type selected. You cann ot send business cards when con nected to WLAN. Chat T h e c h a t f u n c t i o n a l l o w s y o u t o h a v e a c o n v e r s a t i o n w i t h a n o t h e r p e r s o n u s i n g t e x t m e s s a g e s . T h e o t h e r p a r t y m u s t h a v e e i t h e r t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 o r a m o b i l e p h o n e w i t h t h e S M S c a p a b i l i t y . Make sure you have either a GSM or GPRS connection type selected. You cann ot send or re ceive messages w hen conne cted to WLAN. Conf igur ing ch at setting s 1 On the Tools menu, clic k Options . 2 Y ou can configure the following chat settings: Y ou ca n spe cif y the numbe r o f h ours fo r w hich the cha t me ssag es are show n in the Chat window during the conversation . Chat n ame â N i c k n a m e t h a t i s d i s p l a y e d w i t h y o u r c h a t m e s s a g e s .
Nokia Short Messaging 52 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Always show chat window on top â S e l e c t t h i s i f y o u w a n t t h e c h a t w i n d o w t o remain visible even when you have other appli cations o pen. 3 Click OK t o a p p l y t h e s e t t i n g s . Startin g a chat sessio n 1 On the Conta cts p a g e , s e l e c t t h e c o n t a c t y o u w a n t t o s t a r t a c h a t s e s s i o n w i t h . If you do not have a contact card created for the other party , you have to create one first. See âÂÂCreating and editing contactsâ on page 5 1 for more information. 2 Click on t he toolbar , or click Chat o n t h e Tools m e n u . 3 The C h a t dialog box opens. Write the mess age in the Message field and click . 4 W h e n y o u r e c e i v e a r e p l y f r o m t h e o t h e r p a r t y, t h e r e p l y m e s s a g e i s s h o w n automatic ally in the Chat w i n d o w. I t i s n o t s t o r e d i n Inbo x . You can save the chat conversation to a text file. Click on the toolbar to save the file. You can also at tach pictures to your ch at mess ages. See âÂÂPicture messagesâ on page 49 for m ore information on h ow to handle pictures in messages.
Troubleshooting 53 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. T roubleshooting Ins talla tion The installation program is interrupted. Make sure you have en ough power on your computer. Make sure you have enough fr ee disk space on your computer. Make sur e y ou have enough res ourc es availab le in the syste m. Check that you have close d all Windows programs before starting the installation , and that you have not inserted the radio card int o y our computer until p rompted to do so by the installation program. The CD -ROM drive cannot be opened during in stallation. Some CD-ROM drives c annot be opened when installing software from them. If y o u t h i n k t h a t y o u m i g h t n e e d t h e o p e r a t i n g s y s t e m f i l e s d u r i n g t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n , it is advisable that you firs t copy the Nokia D211 installation files to t he h ard drive of your comp atible PC and install the program fr om there . T h e r a d i o c a r d c a n n o t b e i n s e r t e d i n t o t h e P C c a r d s l o t . Check that the radio card is turn ed the right side up. Check the PC card slot for a ny problems. After inserting the radio card, it takes a while before t he computer r esponds. There might be a pause while the drive r initialises the radio card. This is normal. Please wait until t he next message box appears and tells you what to do. This should not take more than a few minut es. Installation to a network drive fails. You cannot install the Nokia D 211 s oftware onto a netw ork drive. T he software must always be inst alled on a local har d drive. I d o n o t h a v e a C D - R O M d r i v e o n m y c o m p u t e r . Using another computer, copy t he installation program on floppy disks. On the CD-ROM there is a fo lder at English\Se tup. Copy the contents of this fol der on f l o p p y d i s k s . I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t y o u t h e n c o p y t h e c o n t e n t s o f t h e d i s k s t o t h e hard drive of your compatible PC before inst alling. If install ed dire ctly fr om the floppy disks, the system will ask you t o change the disk seve ral times.
Troubleshooting 54 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Networ k The r adio card seems to be working, but the n etwork connection does not work. Run the fau lt di agnos is te sts o n t he Tools pa ge. If a ll test s are pas sed su cce ssf ully , m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e n e t w o r k s e t t i n g s a r e c o r r e c t . A s k y o u r s y s t e m a d m i n i s t r a t o r for advice. In Windo ws 98 /Me , N et work N eig hbor ho od does not s how my co mpu ter name at a ll. Other computer s c annot see my computer name in Network Neighborhoo d either. Open the Network dialog box (click Start , Sett ings , Control Panel , Network ) and click the Fi le and Print Shari ng button. Make s ure that the I wa nt to be able to give o thers access to my f iles c h e c k b o x i s s e l e c t e d . O t h e r u s e r s s h o u l d n o w b e able to see your computer in Network Neighborhood. If y ou share folders on your computer , oth er users can see them too. I cannot access the I nterne t. W h e n u s i n g a W L A N c o n n e c t i o n t y p e , c h e c k t h a t y o u u s e a r o u t i n g p r o t o c o l s u c h as TCP/IP. M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e p r o x y s e t t i n g s i n t h e W e b b r o w s e r a r e c o r r e c t . A l s o m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e r e i s a c o n n e c t i o n f r o m y o u r n e t w o r k t o t h e I n t e r n e t . Resources The r adio card does not work and this is prob ably caused by another installed d evice. C h e c k t h a t t h e r a d i o c a r d i s n o t t r y i n g t o u s e a n I / O , I R Q , o r m e m o r y a d d r e s s u s e d b y a n o t h e r d e v i c e i n y o u r c o m p u t e r . T o c h e c k t h e s t a t u s o f r e s o u r c e s i n W i n d o w s 98/Me, click Start - Sett ings - Contr ol Panel - Syst em - Device M anag er - Network Adapters . If the re is a conflict , a yellow symbol is shown in fron t of the name of t he device. Hardware I a m n o t s u r e i f t h e r a d i o c a r d i s w o r k i n g . Check in the Monitor window that the radio card is working. You can also c heck the Status pa ge for th e status of the c onnection . There are no r esource conflicts, but the radio card still does not work. Check that the operat ing e nvironment does not cause damage or interferen ce to the radio card. Detailed information on the operating environment can be foun d in the chapte r âÂÂAbout data trans missio nâ on page 8.
Troubleshooting 55 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Check that the radio card is proper ly inserted. Run fault diagnosi s tests on t he Tool s p a g e . Y o u c a n t r y t o d e t e r m i n e w h e t h e r t h e p r o b l e m l i e s w i t h t h e c o m p u t e r o r t h e r a d i o card by using the c ard in another available PC card slot, by i nstalling t he card in another compute r, or by using another card in the f irst computer. The r adio card does not work in an other PC card slot, but works i n anoth er computer. Try to insert another PC card in the slot to determine if there is a compatibility p r o b l e m b e t w e e n t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 a n d t h e P C c a r d s l o t , o r i f t h e r e i s a g e n e r a l f a u l t with the slot. The SIM card is not detected by the radio card. M a k e s u r e t h a t y o u a r e u s i n g a c o r r e c t t y p e o f S I M c a r d . T h e r a d i o c a r d d o e s n o t support 5 V olt SIM cards. M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e S I M c a r d i s i n s e r t e d c o r r e c t l y : t h e c o n n e c t o r s o n t h e S I M c a r d and t he radi o card must meet. Note: You can find the latest troubleshooting information in the readme.txt f i l e o n t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 C D - R O M . Tip: On t he Tools page you can run fault diagno sis test s and save the te st results t o a text file. The report c an be useful if you n eed, for exa mple, to contact technical support in problem situations.
Care and maintenance 56 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. C a r e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e Your radio card is a produc t of superior design and crafts manship and should be treated w ith care. The suggestions below will help you to fu lfil any warranty o b l i g a t i o n s a n d t o e n j o y t h i s p r o d u c t f o r m a n y y e a r s . ⢠Keep t he r adio card and all its parts and acce ssories out of small children's reach. ⢠Keep the radio card dry. Precipitat ion, humidity , and all types of liqui ds or moisture can contain minerals th at will corrode electronic circuits. ⢠Do not use or store the radio card in dusty , dirt y ar eas. ⢠D o n o t s t o r e t h e r a d i o c a r d i n h o t a r e a s . H i g h t e m p e r a t u r e s c a n s h o r t e n t h e l i f e of e lectronic devices, and warp or melt cer tain plastics. ⢠D o n o t s t o r e t h e r a d i o c a r d i n c o l d a r e a s . W h e n i t w a r m s u p ( t o i t s n o r m a l temperatur e), moisture can form inside, which may damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠D o n o t a t t e m p t t o o p e n t h e r a d i o c a r d . N o n - e x p e r t h a n d l i n g m a y d a m a g e i t . ⢠D o n o t d r o p , k n o c k , o r s h a k e t h e r a d i o c a r d . R o u g h h a n d l i n g c a n b r e a k i n t e r n a l circuit boards. ⢠D o n o t u s e h a r s h c h e m i c a l s , c l e a n i n g s o l v e n t s , o r s t r o n g d e t e r g e n t s t o c l e a n the radio card. ⢠D o n o t p a i n t t h e r a d i o c a r d . Pa i n t c a n p r e v e n t p r o p e r o p e r a t i o n . ⢠Use only the supplied antenna. Un authorised antennas, modifications , or attachments could damage the radio c ard and may viol ate re gulations gover ning radio devi ces. A l l o f t h e a b o v e s u g g e s t i o n s a p p l y e q u a l l y t o y o u r r a d i o c a r d o r a n y a c c e s s o r y . I f a n y o f t h e m i s n o t w o r k i n g p r o p e r l y , t a k e i t t o y o u r n e a r e s t q u a l i f i e d s e r v i c e facility. The pe rsonnel there will assist you and, if necessary, arrange for se rvice.
Impo rtant safet y info rmati on 57 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Important safety information Traffic safety D o n o t u s e t h e r a d i o c a r d w h i l e d r i v i n g a v e h i c l e . D o n o t p l a c e t h e r a d i o c a r d o n the passenger s eat or where it can break loose in a collision or s udden s top. Remember: road s afety al ways comes first! Oper atin g environ ment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always powe r o f f y o u r r a d i o c a r d w h e n e v e r i t i s f o r b i d d e n t o u s e i t , o r w h e n i t m a y c a u s e i n t e r f e r e n c e o r d a n g e r . N o t e t h a t t h e r a d i o c a r d m a y c a u s e s i m i l a r i n t e r f e r e n c e a s any cellular terminal (e.g. mobile phone) and must not be used in areas where the use of a ny such device is prohibit ed. Use the radio card in its normal operating positions. Elec tron ic devices Most modern electronic equipment is s hielded from r adio fr equency (RF) si gnals. However, certain electroni c equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your r adio card. Pacema kers Pacemaker manufacturers recomm end that a minimum separation of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintained betw een a radio card and a p acemaker to avoid potential interfe rence with the pac emaker. These recommen dations are consisten t wit h the independe nt research by and recomme ndations of Wireless Technology Researc h. Persons with pacemakers: ⢠S h o u l d a l w a y s k e e p t h e r a d i o c a r d m o r e t h a n 2 0 c m ( 6 i n c h e s ) f r o m t h e i r pacemaker when the radio card is powe red on . ⢠Should not carry the radio card in a breast pocke t. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect t hat interference is taking place, power off your radio card immediately. Hearing aids Some digital radio cards may interfere with some hearing aids. In t he event of such interfere nce, you may want to consult your service provider. Other medical device s Operatio n of any radio transmitting equipment , inclu ding radio cards, may interfere with the functionality of in adequately protected medical de vices. Consult a physician or th e manuf acture r of the medical de vice to dete rmine if
Impo rtant safet y info rmati on 58 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. they are ad equat ely s hiel ded fro m e xternal RF ener gy or if you hav e any qu estio ns. Power off your radio card in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so . Hospit als or health care f acilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to e xternal RF energy. Vehi cles RF s ignals m ay aff ect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles (e .g. electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti- s k i d ( a n t i - l o c k ) b r a k i n g s y s t e m s , e l e c t r o n i c s p e e d c o n t r o l s y s t e m s , a i r - b a g syst ems) . Chec k with th e manuf actu rer or its repres enta tiv e regar din g your vehicle. You should also consult the man ufacturer of any equipment that has been added to you r vehicl e. Posted facilities Power off your radio card in any facility where posted notices s o requi re. Potenti ally explosi ve atmospher es P o w e r o f f y o u r r a d i o c a r d w h e n l o c a t e d i n a n y a r e a w i t h a p o t e n t i a l l y e x p l o s i v e atmosphere a nd obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such a reas could c ause an e xplosion or fire resulti ng in bodily injury or e ven death . Users are advi sed t o power o ff th e rad io card w hen at a refuelling point (se rvice stati on). Users ar e remin ded of the need t o obse rve rest rict ions on the us e of r adio equipment in fuel de pots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasti ng op erations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosph ere are often but not always clearly marked. These include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities; v e h i c l e s u s i n g l i q u i f i e d p e t r o l e u m g a s ( s u c h a s p r o p a n e o r b u t a n e ) ; a r e a s w h e r e t h e a i r c o n t a i n s c h e m i c a l s o r p a r t i c l e s , s u c h a s g r a i n , d u s t , o r m e t a l p o w d e r s ; a n d a n y o t h e r a r e a w h e r e y o u w o u l d n o r m a l l y b e a d v i s e d t o t u r n o f f y o u r v e h i c l e engine . Vehicle s D o n o t s t o r e o r c a r r y f l a m m a b l e l i q u i d s , g a s e s , o r e x p l o s i v e m a t e r i a l s i n t h e s a m e c o m p a r t m e n t a s t h e r a d i o c a r d , i t s p a r t s o r a c c e s s o r i e s . For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects in the area over the air bag or in t he air bag deployment a r e a . I f t h e r a d i o c a r d i s i m p r o p e r l y p l a c e d a n d t h e a i r b a g i n f l a t e s , s e r i o u s i n j u r y could result. U s i n g y o u r r a d i o c a r d w h i l e i n t h e a i r i s p r o h i b i t e d . R e m o v e y o u r r a d i o c a r d f r o m the PC card slot befor e bo arding an aircraft. The use of radio car ds in an airc raft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless t elephon e network and may be illegal. Failure to obse rve the se instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender, or legal action or both .
Impo rtant safet y info rmati on 59 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Antenna T h i s p r o d u c t m o d e l h a s b e e n t e s t e d a n d m e e t s r a d i o f r e q u e n c y e x p o s u r e g u i d e l i n e s w h e n u s e d i n a p o s i t i o n t h a t k e e p s t h e a n t e n n a a t l e a s t 2 . 0 c m f r o m your body wh en the produ ct is switched on. As with any other radi o t ransmi tting devi ce, do not touch the an tenna unneces sarily when the product is on. Contact with the a ntenna affects connection quality and may cause the radio card to oper ate at a higher power level than otherwise needed.
Glossary 60 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Glossary Access contro ller Physical device that manages permission and restrictions for logging onto a computer or network. Ad hoc O n e o f t h e t w o W L A N o p e r a t i n g m o d e s t h a t c a n b e s e l e c t e d w h e n u s i n g t h e N o k i a D 2 1 1 . W i t h t h i s c o n f i g u r a t i o n o p t i o n , u s e r s c a n s e t u p a w i r e l e s s l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k w h e r e w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s c a n s e n d a n d r e c e i v e d a t a d i r e c t l y w i t h e a c h other without WLAN acce ss points. This type of network is somet imes c alled a peer-to-peer netwo rk. Barring password The barring pas sword is a 4-digit code needed to change call barrings . The p a s s w o r d i s n o t l o c a t e d i n y o u r r a d i o c a r d o r S I M c a r d , b u t i n t h e n e t w o r k . Y o u obtain the pass word from yo ur service pro vider or network operator when you subscribe to the call barring s ervice. Dual-band functionality Dual-band functionality provides s eamless roaming bet ween ne tworks during a call within the same network o pera tor. In practice , this means that you are less l i k e l y t o g e t â N e t w o r k b u s y â m e s s a g e s . W h e n y o u a r e a b r o a d , d u a l - b a n d function ality gives mo re roaming possibil ities, depending on y our network operator' s roam ing agr eement. GSM GSM (Global System for Mobile Communicatio ns) is a digital telecommunications s y s t e m u s e d w i d e l y i n E u r o p e , A s i a a n d t h e P a c i f i c . GPRS General Packet Radio Service . GPR S is a techn ology t hat enables sending a nd r e c e i v i n g d a t a o v e r a m o b i l e n e t w o r k . G P R S a s s u c h i s a d a t a b e a r e r t h a t e n a b l e s wire less ac cess to d ata n etwor ks like the In ternet. The ap plicat ions tha t use GPRS are SMS mess aging and the GPRS dial-up (fo r example, Int erne t and e-mail). GPRS access point Inter face betw een a GPRS netw ork and e xter nal pack et data netw orks , such as the Inter net. Home network Y o u r h o m e n e t w o r k i s t h e n e t w o r k r u n b y t h e o p e r a t o r t h a t i s s u e d y o u r S I M c a r d .
Glossary 61 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data. HSCSD technology enables a data transmi ssion speed of up to 43.2 kilo bits pe r secon d. HSCSD technology is based on t he use of multiple timeslots at the same time. The transmission speed in a single timeslot is 9 . 6 o r 1 4 . 4 k i l o b i t s p e r s e c o n d . Infrastructure O n e o f t h e t w o W L A N o p e r a t i n g m o d e s t h a t c a n b e s e l e c t e d w h e n u s i n g t h e N o k i a D211. With this c onfiguration option users can set up a wirele ss local area n e t w o r k w h e r e w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h w i r e d a n d w i r e l e s s s t a t i o n s thro ugh a WLAN acces s point . Network operator A network operator maintains a cellular telecommunications network in a specific a r e a , o f t e n i n a p a r t i c u l a r c o u n t r y . S e v e r a l n e t w o r k o p e r a t o r s m a y h a v e overlapping networks. N e t w o r k o p e r a t o r s o f f e r a v a r i e t y o f n e t w o r k s e r v i c e s , i n c l u d i n g G S M d a t a s e r v i c e s s u c h a s t h e S h o r t M e s s a g e S e r v i c e ( S M S ) , b o t h t o i n d i v i d u a l s u b s c r i b e r s a n d s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r s . N o t a l l n e t w o r k o p e r a t o r s p r o v i d e e x a c t l y t h e s a m e s e r v i c e s . Network ser vices Special services provided by n etwork ope rators and serv ice providers. T hese services must be subscribed to, and typicall y inc lude the Short Message Ser vice (SMS), data serv ice a nd fax se rvice. Picture message Text message that contains pictures . Eac h picture mess age is made up of severa l t e x t m e s s a g e s . T h i s f u n c t i o n c a n b e u s e d o n l y i f i t i s s u p p o r t e d b y y o u r n e t w o r k operator or servic e provide r. Only devices that offer the pi cture message fea ture can r eceive and display pictures. PIN code P e r s o n a l I d e n t i f i c a t i o n N u m b e r c o d e . P I N c o d e ( 4 t o 8 d i g i t s ) i s a n a c c e s s c o d e f o r protect ing a SIM card a gainst unauthorised use. Profile A profile is a group of network-spe cific and Windows networkin g setti ngs. Profiles enabl e easy transfer from one network to anothe r withou t havin g to rem ember all the diffe rent settin gs. PUK code PIN Unblocking Key code . PUK is a 8-digit code s upplied with the SIM card. The code is ne eded w hen you want t o change a blocked PIN code. You cannot
Glossary 62 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. c h a n g e t h e P U K c o d e . I f y o u l o s e t h e c o d e , c o n t a c t y o u r s e r v i c e p r o v i d e r o r network operator. Securi ty code The security code is supplied with the radio card . It protects your radio card against unau thorised use. Kee p the code secret and in a s afe place, separ ate from t h e r a d i o c a r d . I f y o u k e y i n a n i n c o r r e c t s e c u r i t y c o d e f i v e t i m e s i n s u c c e s s i o n , t h e radio card will not accept the correct code for the next five minute s. Ser vice prov id er A company that o ffers telecommunic ations services, such as n etwork services. A service provider may be a network operator or a separate company. Short message See âÂÂText messag eâ . SIM card Subscri ber Ident ity Mo dule card. A small plas tic card w ith an embedd ed integrated circuit. The SIM card contains all the information the cellular n etwork needs to identify t he network user. The SIM card als o contain s secu rity-related information . SMS Short Message Service. SMS is a network service provide d by network operators or service providers. It enables sending and rece iving sh ort t ext me ssages over the digital cellular network. Th e stan dard length of a text message is 160 characters . Text message Short message that is sent over the digital cellular network. The standard length of a text message is 160 ch aracters. WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy. A security f eature using the RC4 algorithm that p e r f o r m s w i r e l e s s d a t a e n c r y p t i o n . T h e W E P a l g o r i t h m u s e s u p t o 1 5 2 - b i t k e y s . Wireless station Any computing device with a PC card slot, into whi ch the radio card can be inserted in order t o send and receive data. WLAN W i r e l e s s L o c a l A r e a N e t w o r k . A l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k i n w h i c h r a d i o l i n k s a r e u s e d t o connect devices instead of phys ical cables. WLAN ac cess po int Physical device that conne cts wi red and wireles s n etworks together.
Inde x 63 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. Index A access code s ....... ......... ......... ............. ......... .... 37 changin g ........ ......... ......... .......... ......... .... 38 access points GPRS ..... ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 32 WLAN.... .......... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 11 ad hoc networks creat ing ................ ......... .......... ......... ....... 22 joining ......... ............ ......... .......... ......... .... 22 ad hoc o peratin g mod e ................ ......... ....... 12 Admin istrator page ....... ......... .......... ...... 40âÂÂ42 advan ced GSM s ettings ............ ......... ... 34âÂÂ37 advan ced WLAN settings ......... ......... ......... . 28 alert to nes .... ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 37 ante nnas ....... .......... ............ .......... ......... ... 13, 59 autom atic GSM netwo rk sele ction ....... .... 34 autom atic network connec tion .... ......... .... 33 B barrin g calls ........... ......... ......... .......... ............ . 35 barrin g passw ord ........... ............. ......... ......... . 35 busines s cards .......... ............ .......... ......... ....... 51 C call s barring ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 35 divertin g ........ ......... ......... ............. ......... . 34 care and maintena nce .... ............. ......... ....... 56 cell info display ........... ......... .......... ......... ....... 34 changin g acce ss codes .............. ......... ......... . 38 chann els .... .......... ............ ......... .......... ......... .... 29 chat .... ............ .......... ......... ......... .......... ......... .... 51 settin gs ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 51 start ing........... ......... ......... .......... ............ . 52 conn ecting to network.......... .......... ...... 19âÂÂ21 conn ection status indicators ............ ... 21âÂÂ22 conn ection types ........... ......... ............. ......... . 20 selecti ng ........... ......... .......... ......... .......... 26 cont acts ........ .......... ......... ......... .......... ......... .... 50 creat ing ................ ......... .......... ......... ....... 51 deletin g ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 51 editing ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 51 counters.... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... .. 25, 39 creating ad hoc n etworks . .......... ......... ............ ... 22 contac ts .... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 51 installa tion disks ....... ............ ......... ...... 41 networ k conne ctions ......... ......... .. 19âÂÂ21 persona l WE P ke ys .... ............ ......... ...... 44 pictu res ........ ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 50 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... .. 26âÂÂ28 reports , See reports share d WE P ke ys ........... ............ ......... ... 44 D data calls ......... ......... ......... .......... ... 8, 10, 19, 21 counte rs ............. .......... ......... ......... ......... 25 trans mission ........ .......... ......... ......... ......... 8 data and fax communicati on ......... ......... ...... 8 default prof ile .............. .......... ......... ......... ...... 25 definit ions ......... ............ .......... ......... ........ 60âÂÂ62 deleting contac ts .... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 51 delivery reports ............. ......... ......... ...... 48 pictu res ........ ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 50 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 32 share d WE P ke ys ........... ............ ......... ... 44 text m essage s ......... ............. ......... ......... 48 deliver y re ports ............ .......... ......... ........ 36, 46 deletin g ........ ............ .......... ......... ......... ... 48 DHCP , r enewing ........ .......... ......... ......... ......... 37 diagnosi ng faults............ .......... ......... ......... ... 39 disconnect ing from net work ....... ......... ...... 22 distribut ing p rofiles ....... .......... ............ ......... 42 diverting calls............ .......... ......... ............ ...... 3 4 E Easy connection profile........ ............ ......... ... 25 editing contac ts .... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 51 GPRS setting s ......... ............. ......... ......... 31 GSM settings ....... .......... ......... . 30, 34âÂÂ37 persona l WE P ke ys .... ............ ......... ...... 44
Inde x 64 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. picture s ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 50 profiles ........... ......... ......... .......... ...... 28âÂÂ32 securit y se ttings ............ .......... ......... .... 37 shared WEP keys ......... .......... ......... ....... 44 WLAN setting s.......... .......... ..... 28â 30, 37 endi ng net work connection........... ......... .... 22 export ing persona l WE P ke ys ..... ............. ......... .... 45 picture s ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 50 profiles ........... ......... ......... .......... ......... .... 32 F faults diagnosin g .............. ......... .......... ......... .... 39 troubles hooting .... ......... ............. ... 53âÂÂ55 forwa rdi ng calls ........... ............ ......... .......... ......... ....... 34 messag es .... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 48 G General P acket Radio Service (GPRS) .......... 9 genera l set tings .... ......... ......... .......... ............ . 33 glossa ry ......... .......... ............ .......... ......... ... 60âÂÂ62 GPRS ........ .......... ............ ......... .......... ......... ......... . 9 access points ............... .......... ......... ....... 32 pricing ......... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 10 settin gs ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 31 GSM high-speed data (HS CSD)........... ....... 10 GSM settings ............ ......... .......... ..... 30, 34â 37 advanc ed ....... ......... ......... .......... ...... 34âÂÂ37 call barring .......... ............ .......... ......... .... 35 call diverts ........ ......... .......... ......... .......... 34 cell info d isplay .............. .......... ......... .... 34 connect ion s peed ....... .......... ......... ....... 30 display incoming calls ............ ......... .... 34 messag es .... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 36 networ k sele ction .......... .......... ............ . 34 sounds ............ ......... ......... .......... ............ . 37 voice mailbox number ............ ......... .... 34 H hardw are, troubleshootin g .. ............. ......... . 54 High Speed Circuit Swit ched Data (HSCSD) . 10 history ..... .......... ............ ......... .......... ......... ....... 39 HSCSD ............... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... . 10 I importing persona l WE P ke ys .... ............ ......... ...... 45 pictu res ........ ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 50 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 32 Inbox ......... ............ ......... .......... ......... ......... ...... 46 incoming calls ........ ......... .......... ......... ............ 34 infrast ructure operating mode ......... ......... 11 inserting radi o cards ......... .......... ............ ......... ...... 20 SIM cards........... .......... ............ ......... ...... 19 installat ion........... ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 15 modifying ............. .......... ......... ......... ...... 17 trouble shooting ............... ......... ......... ... 53 uninst alling ....... ............. ......... ......... ...... 17 installat ion d isks, creating ........... ......... ...... 41 J joining ad hoc net works ............ ......... ......... 22 M Manager window ........... .......... ......... ......... ... 24 message cen tre ............ .......... ......... ......... ...... 36 message cen tre number ............ ......... ......... 36 messa ges alert to nes ......... .......... ............ ......... ...... 37 delivery reports ............. ......... ......... ...... 36 pictu re messages .......... ............ ..... 49âÂÂ50 setti ngs ........... ......... .......... ......... ............ 36 text message s ......... .......... ......... ..... 47âÂÂ49 validity per iod ........ .......... ......... ............ 36 modifying insta llation ............... ......... ......... 17 Monitor wi ndow .......... .......... ............ ......... ... 25 setti ngs ........... ......... .......... ......... ............ 33 monitor ing status .......... .......... ......... ..... 25, 39 N network autom atic selection ........ ......... ......... ... 34 name.......... ............ .......... ......... ......... ...... 28 serv ices ........... ......... .......... ......... ......... ...... 4 trouble shooting ............... ......... ......... ... 54 network connection ending ....... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... 22 esta blishing ......... .......... ......... ........ 19âÂÂ21 establish ing automatical ly .... ......... ... 33
Inde x 65 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. network profiles, See profiles Nokia Short Messaging ............. ......... ......... . 46 O ope rat ing mo des ad hoc .......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 12 infrast ructure ..... ......... ............. ......... .... 11 Outb ox .... ............. ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 46 P pack et da ta ............ ......... ......... .......... .. 9, 19, 21 passwo rds ......... ......... ......... ............. ......... ....... 37 pers onal WEP keys ........... ............. ......... 39, 43 copying to SIM card ...... .......... ............ . 41 creat ing ................ ......... .......... ......... ....... 44 editing ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 44 exporti ng ....... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 45 importing............. ......... .......... ......... ....... 45 selecti ng ........... ......... .......... ......... .......... 45 pict ure messages ........ ......... .......... .. 46, 49âÂÂ50 deletin g pict ures ............ ............. ......... . 50 drawing pictures ............ .......... ......... .... 50 editing picture s ........... .......... ............ .... 50 exporti ng pictures ............. ......... ......... . 50 importing pict ures......... ............. ......... . 50 sendi ng ........... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 49 settin gs ............. ......... .......... ......... ... 36, 48 See also m e s s a g e s PIN code request...... ......... .......... ......... ......... . 38 powe r s aving ......... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 37 pro fil es copying to SIM card ...... .......... ............ . 41 creat ing ................ ......... .......... ......... 26âÂÂ28 deletin g ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 32 distri buting ... ............ .......... ......... ......... . 42 Easy connection ....... .......... ......... .......... 25 editing ............... ......... .......... ......... ... 28âÂÂ32 exporti ng ....... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 32 importing............. ......... .......... ......... ....... 32 selecti ng ........... ......... .......... ......... .......... 26 sendi ng as text mess age ........... ......... . 32 Profi les page ............. ......... .......... ......... ... 25âÂÂ32 PUK code....... .......... ............ .......... ......... ......... . 38 R radio c ards remo ving ..... ............ .......... ......... ......... ... 22 stopping.......... ............. ......... ......... ......... 22 radio channels........ ......... .......... ............ ......... 29 removing contac ts .... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 51 delivery reports ............. ......... ......... ...... 48 pictu res ........ ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 50 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 32 radi o cards ......... .......... ............ ......... ...... 22 share d WE P ke ys ........... ............ ......... ... 44 text m essage s ......... ............. ......... ......... 48 replying to messa ges ............ ......... ......... ...... 48 reports counte rs ............. .......... ......... ......... ......... 39 diagn ostics ........ .......... ......... ......... ......... 39 history ....... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 39 resour ces ........ ......... ......... ............. ......... ......... 54 restri cting calls ............ ............. ......... ......... ... 35 S safety information ............. ......... ...... 3, 57âÂÂ58 saving persona l WE P ke ys .... ............ ......... ...... 45 pictu res ........ ......... ............. ......... ......... ... 50 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 32 security code re quest ........... ............ ......... ... 38 security in WLAN......... ............. ......... ......... ... 13 security settings .......... ............. ......... ......... ... 37 selecting connect ion types ................ ......... ......... 26 GSM network.... .......... ......... ............ ...... 3 4 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 26 sending business car ds ............ ......... ......... ......... 51 pictu re messages ............. ......... ......... ... 49 profiles ............... .......... ......... ......... ......... 32 text m essage s ......... ............. ......... ......... 47 settings chat ............ ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 51 genera l ...... ......... .......... ............ ......... ...... 33 GPRS ....... ............ .......... ......... ......... ......... 31 GSM ........... ......... .......... ......... ......... .. 34âÂÂ37 GSM, advanced ................ ......... ..... 34âÂÂ37
Inde x 66 é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. securit y ....... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 37 SIM services ........... ............. ......... ......... . 29 text and picture messages . ......... ....... 36 WLAN.... .......... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 37 WLAN, advanced... ......... .......... ......... .... 28 Sett ings page ......... ............ .......... ......... ... 33âÂÂ38 share d WE P ke ys ......... ......... .......... ............ .... 43 creat ing ................ ......... .......... ......... ....... 44 deletin g ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 44 editing ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... 44 short mess ag es, See tex t messages , p icture messag es SIM card s inserti ng ......... ............ .......... ......... ......... . 19 manag ing c ontents ....... .......... ......... .... 41 SIM services ........... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 12 settin gs ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 29 SMS.......... .......... ............ ......... .......... ......... ....... 46 SMS application ...... ............ .......... ......... ....... 36 See also N o k i a S h o r t M e s s a g i n g soun d set tings ....... ......... ......... .......... ............ . 37 star ting chat .......... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 52 stat us indicators ............ ......... ............. ... 21âÂÂ22 stat us reports ........ ......... ......... .......... ............ . 46 stopping radio car ds ..... ............. ......... ......... . 22 T text mess ages ........... ......... .......... ..... 46, 47âÂÂ49 deletin g ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... . 48 forwar ding........ ......... .......... ......... .......... 48 replyi ng ....... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 48 sendi ng ........... ......... ............. ......... ......... . 47 sendi ng profil es........... .......... ......... ....... 32 settin gs ............. ......... .......... ......... ... 36, 48 See also m e s s a g e s T ools page............... ......... ......... .......... ...... 38â 40 traf fic ......... .......... ......... ............ .......... ......... .... 39 tran smitting data ............. .......... ......... ......... .... 8 trouble shooting ....... ......... .......... ............ ....... 54 hardwa re .......... ............ .......... ......... ....... 54 instal lation ....... ......... .......... ............ ....... 53 networ k ............. ............ .......... ......... ....... 54 resource s........ ......... ............. ......... ......... . 54 U uninst alling ............ ......... ......... .......... ............ . 17 V Virtua l Pri vate Network (VPN) .......... ......... 1 3 voice mailbox number....... ............ ......... ...... 34 W WEP .... ............. ......... ......... .......... ......... ..... 42âÂÂ45 WEP keys, See personal WEP keys, shared WEP keys Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) ....... .. 42âÂÂ45 W i r e l e s s L o c a l A r e a N e t w o r k , See W L A N WLAN ........ ......... ......... ............. ......... ........ 10â 13 access points ....... .......... ......... ............ ... 11 ad hoc op erating mode ........ ......... ...... 12 advan ced settings ........ ......... ......... ...... 28 infras tructure operatin g mode ......... 11 monitori ng informati on ....... ......... ...... 40 networ k nam e ............ ......... ......... ......... 28 securit y ..... ......... ............. ......... ......... ...... 13 SIM services ......... .......... ......... ......... ...... 12 statist ics ......... ............. ......... ......... ......... 40 WLAN settings .......... .......... ......... ............ ...... 37 genera l ...... ......... .......... ............ ........ 28, 30 SIM services ......... .......... ......... ......... ...... 29 T CP/IP .. ......... ......... .......... ............ ......... ... 29
é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. LIMITE D MANUFACTUR ER'S WARRAN TY P A R T O F E U R O P E & A F R I C A R E G I O N This limited warranty s hall ap ply in part of Nokia Mobile Phones' Eur ope & Afric a Region un less a loc al warrant y exists. Nokia Corporation , Nokia Mobile Phones (âÂÂNokia âÂÂ) w a r r a n t s t h a t t h i s N O K I A p r o d u c t ( " P r o d u c t " ) i s a t t h e t i m e of its origin al purchase f ree of def ects in materials, design and workmanship subject to the following terms and conditions: 1 This limited warranty is given to th e end-purchaser of the Product ("Custom er"). It shall neither exclude nor limit i) any mandatory statutory rights of the Customer or ii) any o f t h e C u s t o m e r ' s r i g h t s a g a i n s t t h e s e l l e r / d e a l e r o f t h e Product. 2 The w arranty period is twelve (12) months from the date on which the first Custo mer purchased the Product. In case of a subsequent purch ase or other change o f owner/ user, such warranty period shall continu e for the remaining part of the twelve (12) month period and otherwise remain unaffected. This limited warranty is only valid and enforceable in the following countries: any member state of the European Union, Iceland, Norway, and Switze rland. 3 During the warra nty period Nok ia or its authorized service company will repair or replace, at Nokia's s ole discretion, a defective Product . Nokia will return the repaired Produ ct or anothe r Product to the Customer in good workin g condition. All par ts or other equipment for which replacements have been provided shall become the property of Nokia. 4 A repaired or replaced Product will not be given a prolonged or renewed warranty period. 5 T his limited warranty w ill not cover painted covers or other simila r personalized parts. In all c ases tha t require unlocking or locking of an operator SIM-lock, Nokia will first direct the Custo mer to such opera tor for unlocki ng or locking of the operator SIM-lock before repai ring or replacing the Product. 6 T his limited warranty shall not apply to deterior ations due to normal wear a nd tear . This limited warranty sha ll further not apply if: (i) the defect was caused by t he f act that th e Pr oduct has been subjected to: use in contradiction wit h the owne r's/ user manual, rough handling, exposure to moistu re, dampnes s or extreme thermal or environmental conditions or rapid changes in such conditions, corrosion, oxidation, un authorized modifications or connections, unauthorized openin g or repair, repair by use of unauthorized spar e parts, misuse, improper installation, accident, forc es of nature, spillage of food or liquid, influence from chemical products or other a cts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia (including but not limited to deficienci es in consum able parts an d breakage or damage to antennas) unless the defect was caused directly by defects in materials, design or workmansh ip; (ii) Nokia or its authorized service company was not notified by the Customer of the defect within thirty (30) days a fter the appearance of the defect within the warrant y period; (iii) the Product was not returned to Nokia or its authorized service company wit hin thirty ( 30) days after the app earance of t he defect within the warranty period; (iv) the Product serial number, the accessory date code or the IMEI number has been removed, erased, defaced, altered or is illegible; (v) the def ect was caused by a defective function of the cellular or w ireless LAN network; (vi) the defect was c aused by the fact that the Product was us ed with or connected to an a ccessory not manufactured and supplied by Nokia or used in other than its intended use; (vii) the Product software needs to be upgraded due to changes in cellular or wireless LAN network parameters; (viii) the defect was caused by a defe ctive function of the computer to which the Product was connected; (ix) the changes in t he comp uter (inclu ding but not limited t o updates or other changes in its operating s y s t e m ) t o w h i c h t h e P r o d u c t w a s c o n n e c t e d c a u s e malfunction of the Product. 7 T o claim t his limited warranty the Customer shall present either i) a legible and non-modified original wa rranty card which clearly indica tes the name and address of the seller, the date an d place of purchase, t he product type and the IMEI or other ser ial number or alternatively ii) a legible and non-modified original purchase receipt which contain s the same informati on, if such purchase receipt is presented to t he seller/dealer of the Product. 8 T his limited warranty is the Customer's sole and exclusive remedy against Nokia and Nokia's s ole and exclusive liability against the Customer for defe cts or malfunctions of the Product. This limited warranty replaces all other warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written , (non- mandatory ) statutory , contractual, in tort or otherwise. Nokia is in no e vent liable for any inci dental, consequential or in direct damage, costs or expenses. Neither is Nokia in any event liable for any direct damage, costs or expenses, if the Customer is a lega l person. 9 Any change or amendment to this limited warrant y requires Nokia's prior writ ten consent.
é Nokia Corpora tion 2002. All rights reserved. FILL IN WITH B LOCK LE TTERS Purchase r's Name: _____ _______ __________ _______ ________ _______ Addres s: ________ _______ __________ _______ ________ _______ _____ _______ ________ _______ ________ _______ _______ ________ _______ Countr y: _____ ________ __________ _______ _______ ________ _______ Phone: _________ _______ ________ _______ _______ __________ _____ Date of Purch ase (dd /mm/yy): __ __ / __ __ / __ __ Produc t Type (on type label ): __ __ __ - __ Produc t Code (on type label): __ __ __ _ _ __ __ __ Produc t Serial No (on type label): __ __ __ __ __ __ / __ __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ / __ Place of Purchase: ____________ _______ ________ _______ ________ __ Store Name : __________ __________ _______ _______ ________ _______ Store Ad dress: ________ _______ _______ ________ _______ ________ __ _______ ________ _______ ________ _______ _______ ________ _______